EMS Technologies Canada HSD-MK2 Satcom Transeiver User Manual MN 1252 33412

EMS Technologies Canada, Ltd. Satcom Transeiver MN 1252 33412

HSD-MK2 User Manual

23-15-30 TITLE PAGE T-13 JUN 10eNfusion®  HSD-440 Mark 2 TerminalSystem Description, Installation, and Maintenance ManualMN-1252-33412, Revision 001This document provides procedures for the equipment listed below.Model Part NumbereNfusion®  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal115 V ac or 28 V dc1252-A-3820-01
23-15-30 TITLE PAGE T-23 JUN 10PROPRIETARY STATEMENTThis document contains information which is proprietary and confidential to EMS Aviation (EMS Technologies Canada, Ltd., Formation Inc., Sky Connect LLC). Neither this document nor the information contained within may be used for any purpose other than the purpose for which it was prepared. Neither this document nor the information contained within may be disclosed or copied without the prior written permission of EMS Aviation.© 2010 EMS Technologies Canada, Ltd., Formation Inc., Sky Connect LLC. All Rights Reserved.HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal System Description, Installation, and Maintenance ManualDocument Number: MN-1252-33412, Revision 001Revision TableRevision ECR Description001 N/A Draft release for review.Cabin Network Xcelerator® and CNX® are registered trademarks of EMS Technologies, Ltd. Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Other product, brand, service, and company names herein are the trademarks of their respective owners.Our products are under continuous research and development. Any information may therefore be changed without prior notice. EMS Aviation reserves the right to make improvements or changes in the product described in this manual at any time without notice. While reasonable efforts have been made in the preparation of this document to assure its accuracy, EMS Aviation assumes no liability resulting from any errors or omissions in this document, or from the use of the information contained herein. Printed in Canada.EMS Aviation400 Maple Grove Road, Ottawa, Ontario, K2V 1B8, CANADAEMS Aviation Reception: (613) 591-9064EMS Aviation Product Support: (888) 300-7415 (calls are routed to an on-call Product Support specialist after regular business hours)+44 1684 290 020 (UK)(613) 591-3086 (outside North America)EMS Aviation E-mail Help: support@emsaviation.comEMS Aviation Web site: www.emsaviation.comEMS Aviation Sales and Marketing: 800-600-9759
23-15-30 CR-13 JUN 10CUSTOMER RESPONSE FORMTo help us improve the quality of our product documentation, EMS Aviation would appreciate your comments and suggestions on this publication. Please complete the following customer survey and send to EMS Aviation at:EMS Aviation 400 Maple Grove Road Ottawa, ON  K2C 0P9E-mail: techdocs@emsaviation.comPublication information:Publication number: MN-1252-33412Publication title: HSD-440 Mark 2 TerminalSystem Description, Installation, and Maintenance ManualLatest issue date: June 3, 2010Document revision: 001Customer information:Name:Company:Tel:Fax:Email:Comments and suggestions:Date:Comments:
23-15-30 CR-23 JUN 10Blank Page
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 RR-13 JUN 10RECORD OF REVISIONSWhen revisions are received, insert revised pages, record the date, and initial.Revision Number Issue Date Date Inserted Inserted by (initial) Revision Number Issue Date Date Inserted Inserted by (initial)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 RR-23 JUN 10Blank Page
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 SBL-13 JUN 10SERVICE BULLETIN LISTService Bulletin Number Subject Manual Rev. Number Manual Rev. DateN/A N/A N/A N/A
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 SBL-23 JUN 10Blank Page
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 LEP-13 JUN 10LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES* An asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current revision.F indicates a right foldout page with a blank back.Section Page Date
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 LEP-23 JUN 10Blank Page
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 TC-13 JUN 10TABLE OF CONTENTS1. Illustration of Equipment .............................................................................INTRO-22. Product Terms and Conditions...................................................................INTRO-23. Acronyms and Abbreviations......................................................................INTRO-24. Safety Advisories .........................................................................................INTRO-61. Inmarsat System Overview...................................................................................1-12. Equipment Overview.............................................................................................1-33. Equipment Specifications.....................................................................................1-54. System Interfaces................................................................................................1-10A. Central Maintenance Computer (CMC) ..........................................................................1-10B. Source Destination Identification (SDI)  .......................................................................... 1-11C. FWD IDs, ICAO IDs, and IMSI ....................................................................................... 1-11D. Weight-On-Wheel (WOW) Pin Wiring ............................................................................ 1-11E. IRS ARINC 429 Interface ...............................................................................................1-12F. Antenna Interface  ...........................................................................................................1-14G. CMU ..............................................................................................................................1-14H. Antenna Subsystem RF Interface ..................................................................................1-145. User Interfaces.....................................................................................................1-14A. MCDU ............................................................................................................................1-14B. WSC ...............................................................................................................................1-15C. Remote Reset ................................................................................................................1-15D. ISDN Circuit-Switched Data Interface ............................................................................1-15E. Ethernet Data Interfaces  ................................................................................................1-16F. POTS Tip/Ring Interfaces ...............................................................................................1-16G. CEPT-E1 Interface .........................................................................................................1-17H. Maintenance Port Interface ............................................................................................1-17(1) End User Access: Level 1..........................................................................................1-17(2) Field Representative Access: Level 2........................................................................1-17I. Fault Indicator LED ..........................................................................................................1-18J. Self-Test  .........................................................................................................................1-19K. Remote Status Panel (Optional) ....................................................................................1-19
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 TC-23 JUN 106. Software Description .......................................................................................... 1-19A. Software Specifications .................................................................................................. 1-19B. Operational Software Part Numbers ..............................................................................1-19C. Owner Requirements Table (ORT) ................................................................................ 1-201. Registering and Activating Terminals................................................................. 2-1A. Preparing Terminal Information  .......................................................................................2-1(1) Obtaining ISNs.............................................................................................................2-1(2) Identifying the Swift 64 Service Category and Terminal Type ..................................... 2-1B. Obtaining ICAO Addresses .............................................................................................. 2-2C. Choosing Service Providers  ............................................................................................ 2-2D. Registering Terminals ......................................................................................................2-22. Configuring Terminals ..........................................................................................2-3A. Setting up Airborne Networks  ..........................................................................................2-3B. Mapping User Devices for ISDN Services  .......................................................................2-3C. IMNs ................................................................................................................................2-3D. MSNs ...............................................................................................................................2-3E. Configuring User ORT Parameters with the Maintenance Port Utility (MPU)  .................. 2-4F. Configuring Secure ORT Parameters with the Maintenance Port Utility (MPU) ............... 2-4G. Creating ORTs with the Maintenance Port Utility (MPU) ................................................. 2-4H. Understanding CMU Messages ....................................................................................... 2-4I.  Configuring Swift 64 LES Access Codes  .........................................................................2-4(1) General Overview ........................................................................................................ 2-4(2) Changing Default LESs Using the MPU.......................................................................2-5J. Removing the LED Label ..................................................................................................2-6K. Activating Configurations  .................................................................................................2-6L. Verifying Configurations  ...................................................................................................2-73. Using Terminals ....................................................................................................2-7A. Placing Swift 64 Voice, SwiftBroadband, and Fax Calls  .................................................. 2-7(1) Dial Code Prefixes ....................................................................................................... 2-8(2) Mobile-to-Mobile Communication...............................................................................2-10B. Placing Calls with the CEPT-E1 Interface ...................................................................... 2-11C. Using Data Connections ................................................................................................ 2-11D. Operating the MCDU  ..................................................................................................... 2-11(1) Output Ports............................................................................................................... 2-11(2) Input Ports.................................................................................................................. 2-11(3) Screen........................................................................................................................ 2-11
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 TC-33 JUN 10(4) Keyboard....................................................................................................................2-12(5) Special Symbols......................................................................................................... 2-12(6) Navigating the MCDU ................................................................................................2-13(7) Viewing Flight Information..........................................................................................2-14(8) Logging On and Off.................................................................................................... 2-14(9) Viewing Channel Information ..................................................................................... 2-17(10) Viewing Maintenance Information............................................................................ 2-21(11) Configuring Headsets...............................................................................................2-23E. Operating the WSC ........................................................................................................ 2-23F. Performing Cockpit Communications with the MCDU .................................................... 2-24(1) Modes of Operation.................................................................................................... 2-24(2) Accepting and Making Calls....................................................................................... 2-241. Advisories..............................................................................................................3-12. Pre-Installation Inspection ...................................................................................3-1A. Unpacking and Inspecting Equipment ............................................................................. 3-1B. Cabling Notes  ..................................................................................................................3-1(1) Cabling.........................................................................................................................3-2(2) Coaxial Cable Loss Considerations .............................................................................3-23. Mechanical Installation.........................................................................................3-2A. Physical Placement ..........................................................................................................3-2B. Environmental Requirements ........................................................................................... 3-2(1) Heating and Cooling..................................................................................................... 3-2(2) Fan Tray Requirements ............................................................................................... 3-3C. Chassis Grounding  ..........................................................................................................3-44. Electrical Installation ............................................................................................3-4A. Cabling and Connector Requirements ............................................................................. 3-4(1) Power Requirements.................................................................................................... 3-4(2) Ground Requirements..................................................................................................3-4(3) Cable Shielding and Termination................................................................................. 3-4B. Installation Wiring Notes  ..................................................................................................3-5(1) Source/Destination Identification.................................................................................. 3-5(2) Maintenance Port Interface.......................................................................................... 3-5(3) Antenna Subsystem RF Interface ................................................................................3-6(4) WOW Pins....................................................................................................................3-6(5) ICAO IDs......................................................................................................................3-7(6) Remote Status Panel (Optional) ..................................................................................3-9(7) System Configuration Strapping ................................................................................ 3-10(8) System Mode Strap Pins Coding ............................................................................... 3-10(9) Call Light Activation Strapping ................................................................................... 3-11
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 TC-43 JUN 10(10) Hookswitch Strapping .............................................................................................. 3-11(11) Priority 4 Call Strapping............................................................................................ 3-11(12) Cockpit Voice Strapping........................................................................................... 3-12(13) User Interfaces......................................................................................................... 3-12(14) System Interfaces .................................................................................................... 3-13C. Connection Details .........................................................................................................3-155. Passive Intermodulation (PIM) Test................................................................... 3-16A. Overview  ........................................................................................................................3-16B. PIM Requirements  ......................................................................................................... 3-16C. PIM Test  ........................................................................................................................3-16D. PIM Test Results  ...........................................................................................................3-17(1) PIM Test Overall Status ............................................................................................. 3-17(2) Directional PIM Test Results......................................................................................3-196. Installation and Engineering Diagrams.............................................................3-19A. Outline and Installation Diagrams .................................................................................. 3-19B. Interconnection and Contact Assignment Drawings ...................................................... 3-197. Connection Details..............................................................................................3-191. Operational and Diagnostic Testing..................................................................4-35A. General  ..........................................................................................................................4-35B. Test and Fault Isolation Equipment Requirements ........................................................ 4-35C. Terminal Maintenance Port Utility ..................................................................................4-36(1) General Overview ...................................................................................................... 4-36(2) Connection Requirements..........................................................................................4-37(3) Accessing the MPU.................................................................................................... 4-39(4) Using the Terminal MPU............................................................................................4-39(5) Menu Item Descriptions ............................................................................................. 4-40(6) Report Descriptions....................................................................................................4-53(7) Activating Maintenance Reports ................................................................................ 4-56D. Inmarsat Cause Codes ..................................................................................................4-60E. Operational and Diagnostic Test Procedures ................................................................ 4-60(1) Test Setup Procedure ................................................................................................ 4-61(2) Post Test....................................................................................................................4-61(3) Installation and Operational Verification Tests........................................................... 4-62(4) Configuration Parameters Verification .......................................................................4-63(5) System Power-up Checks..........................................................................................4-68(6) System On-Air Checks...............................................................................................4-70(7) Antenna Tracking Checks.......................................................................................... 4-72(8) Optional System Checks............................................................................................ 4-73
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 TC-53 JUN 102. Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation .................................................................4-74A. Troubleshooting Practices  .............................................................................................4-74(1) Non-specific Complaints ............................................................................................ 4-74(2) Specific Complaints.................................................................................................... 4-74B. Equipment Required  ...................................................................................................... 4-74C. Troubleshooting Aids .....................................................................................................4-74(1) Fault Isolation Screen Displays..................................................................................4-75(2) Troubleshooting Table ............................................................................................... 4-79D. Fault Isolation and Diagnostic Procedures  .................................................................... 4-86(1) General ...................................................................................................................... 4-86(2) Saving a Diagnostic Reports File............................................................................... 4-863. Adjustment/Alignment Procedures ...................................................................4-884. Modification History............................................................................................4-881. Maintenance........................................................................................................... 5-12. Repair .....................................................................................................................5-1A. Repair Tools and Supplies ............................................................................................... 5-1B. Repair Procedures ...........................................................................................................5-1C. Battery Replacement  .......................................................................................................5-1D. Removal Procedures  ....................................................................................................... 5-1E. Repair Facility Approvals  .................................................................................................5-1F. Return for Repair Information ...........................................................................................5-23. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness ..........................................................5-21. Configuring ORT Parameters Using the MPU ....................................................6-1A. Connecting to the MPU .................................................................................................... 6-4B. Configuring the ORT Part Number ...................................................................................6-4C. Configuring Cockpit Communication Parameters ............................................................6-5(1) Configuring the Call Signaling Mode............................................................................ 6-5(2) Configuring Outgoing Call Signaling ............................................................................ 6-5(3) Configuring Ground Public Routing.............................................................................. 6-5D. Configuring 4-wire Parameters ........................................................................................ 6-6(1) Configuring 4-wire Wiring.............................................................................................6-6(2) Configuring Ground-to-Cockpit Call Routing................................................................ 6-6(3) Configuring 4-wire Parameters .................................................................................... 6-6E. Configuring POTS Parameters  ........................................................................................6-7(1) Configuring POTS........................................................................................................6-7
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 TC-63 JUN 10F. Configuring CEPT-E1 Parameters .................................................................................... 6-7(1) Configuring CEPT-E1 Interface....................................................................................6-8(2) Configuring the CEPT-E1 Interface Type.....................................................................6-8G. Configuring High Speed Data Services ...........................................................................6-8(1) Configuring the Default PPPoE Service.......................................................................6-8(2) Configuring SCPC High Speed Service....................................................................... 6-8(3) Configuring MPDS High Speed Service.......................................................................6-9(4) Configuring SBB High Speed Service.......................................................................... 6-9H. Configuring Ethernet Parameters  .................................................................................... 6-9(1) Configuring Ethernet Wiring.........................................................................................6-9(2) Configuring Ethernet Duplex Mode............................................................................6-10(3) Configuring the Ethernet Port Address ...................................................................... 6-10(4) Configuring the Ethernet Mask................................................................................... 6-10I. Configuring Networking Parameters For Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2 ............................... 6-11(1) Configuring the Host Name........................................................................................ 6-11(2) Configuring the Access Concentrator Name.............................................................. 6-11(3) Configuring the SNMP Server.................................................................................... 6-11(4) Configuring the SNMP Community String.................................................................. 6-11(5) Configuring the TFTP Server .....................................................................................6-12(6) Configuring the DHCP Client ..................................................................................... 6-12(7) Configuring the DHCP Server....................................................................................6-12(8) Configuring Telnet Access ......................................................................................... 6-12(9) Configuring the Managed Range ...............................................................................6-12(10) Configuring the Number of Managed Addresses..................................................... 6-13(11) Configuring the Access Point Name......................................................................... 6-13J. Configuring Avionics Parameters  ................................................................................... 6-13(1) Configuring the Primary Inertial Reference System (IRS).......................................... 6-13(2) Configuring the Secondary IRS.................................................................................. 6-14(3) Configuring the Secondary IRS Input Speed ............................................................. 6-14(4) Configuring GNSS Equipment ...................................................................................6-14(5) Configuring the ICAO Code Source........................................................................... 6-15K. Configuring Satellite Service ORT Parameters .............................................................. 6-15(1) Configuring the Forward ID........................................................................................ 6-15(2) Configuring Satellite Information................................................................................ 6-16(3) Configuring GES Service Provider Information.......................................................... 6-17(4) Configuring the Frequency Table............................................................................... 6-18(5) Configuring LES Service Provider Information........................................................... 6-19(6) Configuring the SwiftBroadband Timing Mode........................................................... 6-19(7) Configuring the Priority Service for Channel Card One ............................................. 6-20(8) Configuring the Service Type Priority......................................................................... 6-20
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 TC-73 JUN 10L. Configuring Antenna ORT Parameters .......................................................................... 6-20(1) Configuring the Antenna Type ...................................................................................6-20(2) Configuring the Antenna Mounting Rotation Angle.................................................... 6-21(3) Configuring the Antenna Mounting Pitch Angle ......................................................... 6-21(4) Configuring the Antenna Mounting Roll Angle ...........................................................6-21(5) Configuring the HPA to Antenna Loss........................................................................ 6-22(6) Configuring the Diplexer.............................................................................................6-22M. Configuring MCDU ORT Parameters  ............................................................................ 6-23(1) Configuring MCDU Wiring.......................................................................................... 6-23(2) Configuring the MCDU Input Speed........................................................................... 6-23(3) Configuring the MCDU Output Speed........................................................................ 6-23(4) Configuring the MCDU Controller Type .....................................................................6-23(5) Configuring the MCDU Type...................................................................................... 6-24(6) Configuring the MCDU Font Colour ........................................................................... 6-24(7) Configuring Manual Dialing........................................................................................ 6-24(8) Configuring Outgoing Call Pre-Selection ................................................................... 6-24(9) Configuring the Address Book Categories................................................................. 6-25N. Configuring the CMU  ..................................................................................................... 6-25(1) Configuring CMU Wiring ............................................................................................ 6-25(2) Configuring the CMU Input Speed ............................................................................. 6-26(3) Configuring the CMU Output Speed .......................................................................... 6-26(4) Configuring the CMU-SDU Join/Leave Word.............................................................6-26(5) Configuring Hardcoded SAL ...................................................................................... 6-27O. Configuring Terminal Operation  ....................................................................................6-27(1) Configuring Air/Ground Status Restrictions ............................................................... 6-27(2) Configuring Transmit on Ground................................................................................ 6-27(3) Configuring Self-test in Air .........................................................................................6-28(4) Configuring Maintenance Command Execution in Air................................................ 6-28(5) Configuring MCDU PAST........................................................................................... 6-28(6) Configuring Field Loadable Software......................................................................... 6-28(7) Configuring the Logon/Handover Policy..................................................................... 6-29(8) Configuring Logon Interrogation................................................................................. 6-29(9) Configuring High-rate R/T in Global Beam................................................................. 6-29(10) Masking Position in Logs ......................................................................................... 6-29(11) Configuring HSD SAL............................................................................................... 6-30P. Configuring Passive Intermodulation (PIM) Parameters ................................................ 6-30(1) Configuring PIMBIT HGA Azimuth Offset Angle ........................................................ 6-30(2) Configuring PIMBIT IGA Azimuth Offset Angle.......................................................... 6-30(3) Configuring PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angle1...................................................... 6-31(4) Configuring PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angle2...................................................... 6-31(5) Configuring PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle1 ....................................................6-31
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 TC-83 JUN 10(6) Configuring PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle2 ....................................................6-31(7) Configuring PIMBIT Measurement Discard Ratio ...................................................... 6-31(8) Configuring PIMBIT Failure Threshold....................................................................... 6-32(9) Configuring PIMBIT Pointing Failure Threshold......................................................... 6-322. Configuring ORT Parameters Using the EMS ORT Application......................6-32A. Creating an ORT Configuration  .....................................................................................6-33B. Opening a Saved ORT Configuration  ............................................................................6-35C. Importing a Phone Book Into the ORT Configuration .................................................... 6-35D. Exporting an ORT File  ................................................................................................... 6-37E. Loading an ORT File into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal  ..............................................6-371. I-3 Satellites .......................................................................................................... A-12. I-4 Satellites .......................................................................................................... A-41. Understanding Messages Transmitted to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ........F-1A. Understanding System Identification Label 172 ...............................................................F-1B. Understanding Status Word 1; Label 270 ........................................................................F-1C. Understanding Status Word 2; Label 276 ........................................................................F-2D. Understanding Protocol File Transfer to SDU1 via Williamsburg  ....................................F-22. Understanding Messages Received from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.........F-2A. Understanding System Identification Label 172 ...............................................................F-2B. Understanding Status Word 1; Label 270 ........................................................................F-3C. Understanding Join/Leave Word; Label 271 ....................................................................F-5D. Understanding Protocol File Transfer to CMU via Williamsburg ......................................F-63. Understanding BOP Options................................................................................F-64. Understanding LDUs and File Size......................................................................F-75. Understanding LDU Size and Word Count .........................................................F-76. Understanding Word Format................................................................................F-7A. Understanding SALs ........................................................................................................F-7B. Understanding Data .........................................................................................................F-7C. Understanding General Format Identifier (GFI) Definitions  .............................................F-87. Understanding Word Types .................................................................................F-8A. Understanding the Full Binary Data Word  .......................................................................F-9B. Understanding the Partial Binary Data Word  ...................................................................F-9C. Understanding Protocol Words ........................................................................................F-9
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 TC-93 JUN 10D. Understanding the Solo Word ........................................................................................F-10E. Understanding Start of Transmission (SOT) ..................................................................F-11F. Understanding End of Transmission (EOT) ....................................................................F-11
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 TC-103 JUN 10Blank Page
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 TC-113 JUN 10LIST OF FIGURESFigure INTRO-1 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal........................................................................INTRO-2Figure 1-1 Simplified Aeronautical Satellite Communications System ........................................1-2Figure 1-2 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal SCM.................................................................................1-4Figure 1-3 HSD-440Stand-Alone Terminal Interfaces ...............................................................1-10Figure 1-4 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ISDN Connections .........................................................1-16Figure 2-1 Dialing-Sequence Components..................................................................................2-7Figure 2-2 Mobile-to-Mobile Dialing Sequence..........................................................................2-10Figure 2-3 MCDU Screen ..........................................................................................................2-12Figure 2-4 MCDU Menus...........................................................................................................2-13Figure 3-1 Fan Tray Plug Configuration (black = installed, white = removed).............................3-3Figure 3-2 ICAO ID, Hex to Binary Conversion ...........................................................................3-8Figure 3-3 Remote Reset Circuit Switch......................................................................................3-9Figure 3-4 Remote LED Panel Circuit........................................................................................3-10Figure 3-5 RJ45 Connector Terminator Details .........................................................................3-13Figure 3-6 Example PIM Test Results .......................................................................................3-18Figure 3-7 (Sheet 1). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Outline and Installation Diagram (1252-E-3820-01, Rev A) ...............................................................................................3-27Figure 3-8 (Sheet 2). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Outline and Installation Diagram (1252-E-3820-01, Rev A) ...............................................................................................3-29Figure 3-9 (Sheet 1). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal  System Interconnection Diagram (1252-B-3820, Rev B) ...............................................3-31Figure 3-10 (Sheet 2). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal System Interconnection Diagram (1252-B-3820, Rev B) ...............................................3-33Figure 4-1 Remote Connection, Maintenance Cable.................................................................4-38Figure 4-2 Direct Connection, Maintenance Cable ....................................................................4-38Figure 4-3 Menu 2 Screen Display ............................................................................................4-42Figure 4-4 Menu 3 Screen Display ............................................................................................4-43Figure 4-5 Menu 3 - Item M: Miscellaneous EEPROM Parameters ..........................................4-45Figure 4-6 Menu 4 Screen Display ............................................................................................4-48Figure 4-7 Menu 10 Screen Display ..........................................................................................4-49Figure 4-8 Menu 13 Screen Display ..........................................................................................4-50Figure 4-9 Menu 14 Screen Display ..........................................................................................4-51Figure 4-10 Menu 15 Screen Display ........................................................................................4-51Figure 4-11 Menu 21 Screen Display ........................................................................................4-52
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 TC-123 JUN 10Figure 4-12 Menu 30 Screen Display ........................................................................................ 4-53Figure 4-13  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU Reports.............................................................. 4-56Figure 4-14 Example Report 23 Output..................................................................................... 4-57Figure 4-15 Prompt to Select Channel for Report Generation................................................... 4-58Figure 4-16 Example of Report 17, Channel Card 2, Channel 3 ............................................... 4-58Figure 4-17 Example of Report 20............................................................................................. 4-59Figure 4-18 Example Report 21.................................................................................................4-59Figure 4-19 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ORT Display Example ................................................. 4-67Figure 4-20 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Power-Up Display Example......................................... 4-70Figure 4-21  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Call Display Example.................................................. 4-72Figure 4-22 Successful OR Registration (report 21 activated) ..................................................4-75Figure 4-23 Failed OR Registration ...........................................................................................4-75Figure 4-24 No Call (report 23).................................................................................................. 4-75Figure 4-25 In Call—Swift 64 Voice Call on Channel 1 (reports 21 and 23).............................. 4-75Figure 4-26 No IRS Data (report 23 activated) ..........................................................................4-76Figure 4-27 FWD ID Not Strapped (no reports activated) ......................................................... 4-76Figure 4-28 No Strap on SDI Lines, Open (no reports activated).............................................. 4-77Figure 4-29 Wrong Strap on SDI Lines (TP5A to GND) ............................................................4-78Figure 4-30 Incorrect Dialing Format (report 52 enabled) ......................................................... 4-78Figure 4-31 Top/Port Antenna Status (reports 18, 19, and 20 activated) .................................. 4-79Figure A-1 ORs............................................................................................................................A-1Figure A-2 Inmarsat I-3 Satellite Beam Coverage—Composite Map ..........................................A-2Figure A-3 Inmarsat I-3 Satellite Beam Coverage—OR Maps ....................................................A-3Figure A-4 Inmarsat I-4 Satellite Beam Coverage Map ...............................................................A-4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 TC-133 JUN 10LIST OF TABLES Table 1-1 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Characteristics and Specifications ...................................1-5 Table 1-2 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal RTCA/DO-160E Environmental Characteristics ..............1-8 Table 1-3 Inertial Type Labels ..................................................................................................1-12 Table 1-4 GNSS Type Labels...................................................................................................1-12 Table 1-5 Hybrid Type Labels...................................................................................................1-13 Table 1-6 AES ID Type Labels .................................................................................................1-14 Table 1-7 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal LED Output Designations ..............................................1-18 Table 1-8 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Operational Software .....................................................1-19 Table 2-1 Inmarsat Swift 64 LES Operator and Access Codes..................................................2-5 Table 2-2 Dial Code Prefixes for Forcing Service Type Selection..............................................2-8 Table 2-3 Dial Code Prefixes for System Overrides .................................................................2-10 Table 2-4 Call Discrete Outputs in HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal .................................................2-25 Table 2-5 Priority Codes ...........................................................................................................2-26 Table 3-1 Cable Shielding and Termination Specifications ........................................................3-5 Table 3-2 RF Parameters Definitions..........................................................................................3-6 Table 3-3 WOW Pin Wiring.........................................................................................................3-7 Table 3-4 Configuration Pin Summary......................................................................................3-10 Table 3-5 System Pin Strapping ...............................................................................................3-11 Table 3-6 Call Light Activation Configuration Strapping ...........................................................3-11 Table 3-7 Hookswitch Configuration Strapping.........................................................................3-11 Table 3-8 Priority 4 Call Configuration Strapping......................................................................3-12 Table 3-9 Chime and Light Strapping for Cockpit Voice...........................................................3-12 Table 3-10 RJ45 Wiring Details ................................................................................................3-13 Table 3-11 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to BSU Interconnects...................................................3-14 Table 3-12 CMU Strapping .......................................................................................................3-15 Table 3-13 MCDU Strapping.....................................................................................................3-15 Table 3-14 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Top Plug Connection Details...............................3-20 Table 3-15 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Middle Plug Connection Details ..........................3-23 Table 3-16 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Bottom Plug Connection Details .........................3-26 Table 4-1 List of Required Test Equipment ..............................................................................4-36 Table 4-2 List of Optional Test Equipment................................................................................4-36 Table 4-3 Remote Connection Cabling.....................................................................................4-37 Table 4-4 Direct Connection Cabling........................................................................................4-37
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 TC-143 JUN 10 Table 4-5 Terminal Connection Settings .................................................................................. 4-39 Table 4-6 Menu 1 Item Descriptions......................................................................................... 4-41 Table 4-7 Menu 2 Item Descriptions......................................................................................... 4-42 Table 4-8 Menu 3 Item Descriptions......................................................................................... 4-43 Table 4-9 Menu 3, Item M EEPROM Parameter Descriptions.................................................. 4-45 Table 4-10 Menu 4 Item Descriptions....................................................................................... 4-48 Table 4-11 Menu 10 Item Descriptions..................................................................................... 4-49 Table 4-12 Menu 13 Item Descriptions..................................................................................... 4-50 Table 4-13 Menu 14 Item Descriptions..................................................................................... 4-51 Table 4-14 Menu 15 Item Descriptions..................................................................................... 4-52 Table 4-15 Menu 21 Item Descriptions..................................................................................... 4-52 Table 4-16 Menu 30 Item Descriptions  ...................................................................................4-53 Table 4-17 Report 23 Item Descriptions ................................................................................... 4-57 Table 4-18 Reports 8 and 20 Item Descriptions .......................................................................4-59 Table 4-19 Report 21 Item Descriptions ................................................................................... 4-60 Table 4-20 Test Setup Procedure.............................................................................................4-61 Table 4-21 Post Test Procedure............................................................................................... 4-61 Table 4-22  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Mechanical Verification...............................................4-62 Table 4-23  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Electrical Verification Checklist...................................4-62 Table 4-24 Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation ....................................................................... 4-80 Table 6-1 Configuring Secure ORT Parameters......................................................................... 6-1 Table 6-2 User ORT Parameters................................................................................................ 6-4 Table F-1 Status Word 1.............................................................................................................F-1 Table F-2 Bits 9 and 10 Positions...............................................................................................F-2 Table F-3 Status Word 1 Bits......................................................................................................F-3 Table F-4 Join/Leave Word Bits .................................................................................................F-5 Table F-5 BOP Option Defaults ..................................................................................................F-6 Table F-6 BOP Word Format......................................................................................................F-7 Table F-7 GFI Definitions............................................................................................................F-8 Table F-8 Word Types ................................................................................................................F-8 Table F-9 Protocol Words and Uses...........................................................................................F-9 Table F-10 Data Types .............................................................................................................F-10 Table G-1 International Access and Country Codes ................................................................. G-1 Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions ............................................................................. H-1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 INTRO-13 JUN 10INTRODUCTIONThis manual provides the specifications, principles of operation, and information necessary to install the: • HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, 1252-A-3820-01This document is divided into the following sections: • System Description • System Operation • Installation • Test and Fault Isolation • Maintenance and Repair • Configuring the Owners Requirements Table (ORT) • Appendix A: Inmarsat Satellite Beam Coverage • Appendix B: Troubleshooting Checklist • Appendix C: RJ45 Cable Termination Details • Appendix D: Installation Planning Checklist • Appendix E: Installation Checklist • Appendix F: CMU Messages • Appendix G: International Access and Country Codes • Appendix H: Inmarsat Cause Codes • Appendix I: CMC MessagesNOTE: An Illustrated Parts List is not included with this manual.Only qualified avionics personnel who are knowledgeable in the technical and safety issues related to the installation of aircraft communications equipment should perform the installation procedures provided in this manual.This manual includes general installation guidelines only; it is not intended to provide specific procedures for every type of installation.If necessary, the information in this manual will be revised. Before attempting the installation procedures presented in this manual, verify that you have a complete and up-to-date release of this document.NOTE: Depending on your HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal’s software version and configuration, the actual (live) system messages you see, such as dialog boxes and screen displays, may differ slightly from the examples in this manual.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 INTRO-23 JUN 101. Illustration of EquipmentFigure INTRO-1 shows the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.Figure INTRO-1  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal2. Product Terms and ConditionsAs stipulated in the Terms and Conditions of Sale, which accompanied the Product, EMS Aviation shall not at any time be liable for the activation, continuation, or cancellation of satellite airtime services relating to the Product nor be responsible for any Product-related airtime or network charges, however incurred. In the event EMS Aviation is charged network or airtime fees relating to the customer’s use of the Product, the customer shall immediately upon notification by EMS Aviation reimburse EMS Aviation in full for such charges.3. Acronyms and AbbreviationsThe following acronyms and abbreviations are used in this document.AC Access Concentratorac Alternating CurrentACARS Aircraft Communication Addressing and Reporting SystemACP Audio Control PanelACSE Access Control and Signalling EquipmentACU Antenna Control Unit (also known as BSU or Driver)AERO AeronauticalAES Aircraft Earth StationAMBE Advanced Multi Band Excitation
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 INTRO-33 JUN 10Americas Americas (satellite)AMO Approved Maintenance OrganizationAOR-E Atlantic Ocean Region-EastAOR-W Atlantic Ocean Region-WestAPAC Asia-Pacific (satellite)ATC Air Traffic ControlAWG American Wire GaugeBGAN Broadband Global Area NetworkBITE Built-In Test EquipmentBOP Bit Oriented Protocolbps Bits per secondBRI Basic Rate ISDNBSU Beam Steering Unit (also known as ACU or Driver)C/No Carrier-to-NoiseCCW Counter ClockwiseCFDS Centralized Fault Display SystemCMC Central Maintenance ComputerCMU Communications Management UnitCRC Cyclic Redundancy CheckCW Clockwisedc Direct CurrentDITS Digital Information Transfer SystemDLNA Diplexer/Low-Noise AmplifierDSL Digital Subscriber LineD-UART Dual Universal Asynchronous Receiver TransmitterEIRP Effect Isotropic Radiated PowerEMI Electromagnetic InterferenceESD Electrostatic DischargeEST Eastern Standard TimeEMEA Europe / Middle East Africa (satellite)FAA Federal Aviation AuthorityFET Field-Effect TransistorFMS Flight Management SystemFRLP Forward Return Link PairFWD ID Forward IDGES Ground Earth StationGND GroundGNSS Global Navigation Satellite SystemHGA High-gain AntennaHPA High Power AmplifierHTML Hyper Text Markup LanguageHz Hertz
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 INTRO-43 JUN 10I/O Input/OutputICAO International Civil Aviation OrganizationICD Interconnection DrawingIMEI International Mobile Equipment IdentifierIMSI International Mobile Subscriber IdentifierIMN Inmarsat Mobile NumberINS Inertial Navigational SystemIOR Indian Ocean RegionIRS Inertial Reference SystemISDN Integrated Services Digital NetworkISN Inmarsat Serial NumberISP Inmarsat Service ProvidersISP Internet Service ProviderJAA Joint Aviation Authoritieskbps Kilobits per SecondLAN Local Area NetworkLES Land Earth StationLRU Line Replaceable UnitLS line selectLSB Least Significant BitMA Mechanical Steered AntennaMbps Megabit per secondMCDU Multipurpose Control Display UnitMCU Modular Concept UnitMES Mobile Earth StationM-ISDN Mobile Integrated Services Digital NetworkMPDS Mobile Packet Data ServicesMPU Maintenance Port Utilityms MillisecondMSB Most Significant BitMSN Mobile Serial NumberMSN Multiple Subscriber NumberMTSAT Meteorological SatelliteNAT Network Address TranslationNO normally openNT Network TerminatorO&I Outline and Installation DiagramOA Other AntennaOCXO Oven Controlled Crystal OscillatorOEM Original Equipment ManufacturerOR Ocean RegionORR Ocean Region Registration
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 INTRO-53 JUN 10ORT Owner Requirements TablePAST Person Activated Self TestPC Personal Computer (or laptop)PIM Passive IntermodulationPN Part NumberPOR Pacific Ocean RegionPOST Power On Self TestPOTS Plain Old Telephone SystemPPP Point-to-Point ProtocolPPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over EthernetPSTN Public Switch Telephone NetworkPTT Push-to-TalkRAM Random Access MemoryREA Responsible Engineering AuthorityRF Radio FrequencyRFI Radio Frequency InterferenceRFU Radio Frequency Unitrms root mean squareROM Read-only MemoryRTN ReturnRx ReceiveS/T (ISDN) ISDN ‘S interface’ refers to the electrical interface between NT1 and NT2 devices, such as a PBX. ISDN ‘T interface’ refers to the electrical interface between NT1 or NT2 and ISDN devices.SBB SwiftBroadbandSCM SDU Configuration ModuleSCPC Single Channel per CarrierSDI Source/Destination IdentificationSDU Satellite Data UnitSNAC Single Network Access Code SPID Service Profile IdentifierSTBD StarboardSTE Secure Terminal EquipmentSTU Secure Telephone UnitTA Terminal AdapterTE Terminal EquipmentTFTP Trivial File Transfer ProtocolTx TransmitUSIM Universal Subscriber Identity ModuleVHF very high frequency VSWR Voltage Standing Wave RatioWOW Weight on Wheels
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 INTRO-63 JUN 10WSC Williamsburg SDU ControllerWSCI Williamsburg SDU Controller Interface4. Safety AdvisoriesWarnings, cautions, and notes in this manual provide the reader with the following information: • A WARNING describes an operation, procedure, or condition that, if not obeyed, could cause injury or death. • A CAUTION describes an operation, procedure, or condition that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to the equipment. • A NOTE provides supplementary information or explanatory text that makes it easier to understand and perform procedures.All personnel who install, operate, and maintain the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and associated test equipment must know and obey the safety precautions listed below. The procedures provided in this manual assume that the person performing installation or maintenance tasks is familiar with and obeys standard aviation shop and safety practices.The general safety advisories include the following:WARNING: TO AVOID RISK OF INJURY FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, DISCONNECT THE POWER FROM THE TERMINAL DURING INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL. WARNING: SERVICE PERSONNEL MUST OBEY STANDARD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, SUCH AS WEARING SAFETY GLASSES, TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY WHILE INSTALLING OR PERFORMING SERVICE ON THIS TERMINAL.WARNING: ASSOCIATED SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT RADIATES HIGH FREQUENCY RADIATION AND POSES A RADIATION HAZARD OF 1.6 GHZ. SERVICE PERSONNEL MUST EXERCISE CARE TO KEEP CLEAR OF THE ANTENNA'S BEAM WHILE PERFORMING OPERATIONAL TESTS OR INSTALLATION VERIFICATION PROCEDURES.  DO NOT APPROACH WITHIN 8 FEET (2.5 METRES) OF THE ANTENNA DURING ANTENNA OPERATION (TRANSMISSION).  DURING ANTENNA OPERATION (TRANSMISSION), MAKE SURE THAT PERSONNEL ARE EXPOSED TO A MINIMUM OF ANY REFLECTED, SCATTERED, OR DIRECT BEAMS.CAUTION: TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING ANY TERMINAL FROM WIRING. DISCONNECTING THE TERMINAL WITHOUT TURNING POWER OFF MAY CAUSE VOLTAGE TRANSIENTS THAT CAN DAMAGE THE TERMINAL.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 INTRO-73 JUN 10CAUTION: THIS EQUIPMENT INCLUDES ITEMS THAT ARE ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE (ESDS) DEVICES. ESDS DEVICES ARE SUBJECT TO DAMAGE BY EXCESSIVE LEVELS OF VOLTAGE AND/OR CURRENT. THE LOW-ENERGY SOURCE THAT MOST COMMONLY DESTROYS ESDS DEVICES IS THE HUMAN BODY, WHICH, IN CONJUNCTION WITH NONCONDUCTIVE GARMENTS AND FLOOR COVERINGS, GENERATES AND RETAINS STATIC ELECTRICITY. TO ADEQUATELY PROTECT ESDS DEVICES, THE DEVICE AND EVERYTHING THAT CONTACTS IT MUST BE BROUGHT TO GROUND POTENTIAL BY PROVIDING A CONDUCTIVE SURFACE AND DISCHARGE PATHS. USE STANDARD INDUSTRY PRECAUTIONS TO KEEP RISK OF DAMAGE TO A MINIMUM WHEN TOUCHING, REMOVING, OR SERVICING THE EQUIPMENT.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 INTRO-83 JUN 10Blank Page
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 1-13 JUN 10SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONThis section includes basic information about HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals, and includes the following sections: • Inmarsat System Overview • Equipment Overview • Equipment Specifications • System Interfaces • User Interfaces • Software Description1. Inmarsat System OverviewThis section provides an overview of the Inmarsat satellite communications system and networks.The satellite communication system includes global satellite networks, Land Earth Stations (LESs), Ground Earth Stations (GESs), Aircraft Earth Stations (AESs), and Mobile Earth Stations (MESs).The LES/GES is the part of the satellite communication system that is on the ground. These numerous, international stations are responsible for routing voice and data calls from the MES/AES to their destinations around the world. The MES/AES is the part of the satellite communication system that is on the aircraft. This station includes the following components: • HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal • Antenna subsystem • Cabin communications system • Analog connected telephones • Cockpit voice system • Other aircraft avionicsFigure 1-1 illustrates a simplified satellite communications system.
Figure 1-1  Simplified Aeronautical Satellite Communications SystemSYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 1-23 JUN 10Satellite communication systems provide users with long-range voice and data communication by accessing global satellite and ground communications networks.Inmarsat is an international organization that operates and maintains multiple geostationary satellites and satellite networks. Inmarsat networks provide services for aviation, shipping, and land-mobile terminals. Inmarsat provides information about satellite beam coverage at www.inmarsat.com.Inmarsat’s I-3 satellites provide Aero H+ and Swift 64 services for aviation. The satellites connect to ground telecommunication systems through the LES/GES. Each satellite is located over an Ocean Region (OR)—the current OR names are: • Atlantic Ocean Region-East (AOR-E) • Atlantic Ocean Region-West (AOR-W) • Indian Ocean Region (IOR) • Pacific Ocean Region (POR)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 1-33 JUN 10Inmarsat’s I-4 satellites provide SwiftBroadband (SBB) services and Aero H+ services. The three I-4 satellites are: • Americas • EMEA (Europe, Middle East and Africa) • Asia-PacificThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, in conjunction with an ARINC 741/781 High-gain Antenna (HGA), acts as an MES/AES. The combined system provides users with a data and voice communications link to the satellite network and global telecommunications system.2. Equipment OverviewHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals are scalable, high-speed data, satellite communications terminals that provide world-wide voice and data services to aircraft through high-speed communication links with the Inmarsat Satellite Network. HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals interface with ARINC 741/781-compatible antenna subsystems to communicate with the space segment of the Inmarsat Satellite Network via L-band RF signals.HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals communicate with various avionics equipment, such as the aircraft’s IRS and CMU, to coordinate and access a wide range of services. The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals also communicate with cabin and cockpit voice and data equipment to provide phone, fax, Internet connection, and other services on board the aircraft.HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals contain the following: • One channel card for Swift 64 or SBB services • One Classic Aero multi-channel channel card • Data input/output (I/O) card • High stability reference oscillator • Control processor card • High Power Amplifier (HPA) • SDU Configuration Module (SCM) • Universal (115 V ac 400 Hz / 28 V dc) power supplyHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals support the following services: • Inmarsat Mobile Integrated Services Digital Network (M-ISDN) Single Channel Per Carrier (SCPC) Service • Inmarsat Mobile Packet Data Services (MPDS) via PPPoE • Inmarsat Aero P, R, T channel data • Two channels of Inmarsat Aero C channel H+ voice
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 1-43 JUN 10 • Cockpit communications for air-to-ground calls using the MCDU, or the WSC • CEPT-E1 • SwiftBroadband (SBB) packet-switched and circuit-switched servicesThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal contains a SCM that has four SIM card slots. Each slot (and each SIM card) is associated with a specific channel. To use the SBB service, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal obtains subscriber information from the SIM card installed in Slot 1. Slot 2 is reserved for future use. Channel card two provides Classic services and as Classic services do not require a SIM card, slots 3 and 4 are not used. Figure 1-2 shows the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal SCM.Figure 1-2  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal SCMHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals have four different types of ports that provide ISDN, CEPT-E1, Ethernet, and Plain Old Telephone Service (POTS) to users in the aircraft cabin. Although able to support multiple configurations depending on user needs, the following constraints apply: • EURO ISDN S/T port supports: • In Swift 64 mode, one or two channels of 64kbps UDI, 56kbps Data, 64kbps 3.1kHz Audio, or 64kbps Speech • In SBB mode, one channel of 64kbps UDI, 56kbps Data, 64kbps 3.1kHz Audio, or 4kbps AMBE+2 Voice • 10BASE-T port supports: • In Swift 64 mode, one or two channels of 64kbps data or MPDS through PPPoE • In SBB mode, up to 11 simultaneous packet-switched (PS) data calls and one circuit-switched (CS) call
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 1-53 JUN 10 • POTS supports: • In Swift 64 mode, one or two channels of ISDN (speech) or 3.1kHz audio (fax) • In SBB mode, one channel AMBE+2 voice or 3.1kHz audio (fax) • CEPT-E1 is offered through the Aero-H+ service and offers 1 or 2 channels of voiceNOTE: Only one service type can be used at one time on aHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal channel. Channel card 1 can support two channels of Swift 64 service when in this mode or one channel of SwiftBroadband service.3. Equipment SpecificationsThis section includes the physical and environmental characteristics of HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals.Table 1-1 lists the physical characteristics and specifications for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals. Table 1-1  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Characteristics and Specifications Characteristic SpecificationCertification/related documentsARINC characteristics 600-12, Air Transport Avionics Equipment Interfaces, December 12, 1998Attachment 10 of the ARINC 704-7RTCA documents RTCA/DO-160E, Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne Equipment,  July 29, 1997HSD-440 Terminal Software RTCA/DO-178B Level D/E (For more information, refer to "Software Specifications" on page 1-19)Physical SizeHeight 19.41 cm (7.64 in)Width 26.09 cm (10.27 in)Length 38.66 cm (15.22 in)Weight 16.1 kg (35.5 lbs)Mounting information 8-MCU Tray (per ARINC 600, 8-MCU LRU)Maintenance requirements No scheduled maintenance is requiredElectrical specificationsHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal AC input powerVoltage Minimum: 92 V rms—min start voltage: 100V rmsTypical: 115 V rmsMaximum: 122 V rms
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 1-63 JUN 10Power consumption Maximum: 460 WNOTE: Of this power consumption, 400  W is dissipated internally and 60 W of RF power is dissipated externally.Frequency Minimum: 360 HzTypical: 400 HzMaximum: 800 HzPower Factor Leading: >0.77Lagging: >0.62HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal DC input powerVoltage Minimum: 22 V dc for startup, 20.5 V dc for operationTypical: 28 V dcMaximum: 33.2 V dcPower consumption  Maximum: 460 WNOTE: Of this power consumption, 400 W is dissipated internally and 60 W of RF power is dissipated externally.Power requirementsAC 115 V ac, 400 Hz nominal, @ 4 A (460 W maximum)DC + 28 V dc @ 15.5 A (460 W maximum)Wire gauge DC power: 12 AWGAC power: 20 AWG (hot lead), 12 AWG (cold lead)Signals: Unless otherwise specified, use 22 AWG for all signal wiresGround requirements ARINC 741Circuit breakers Install circuit breakers according to the maintenance requirements of the aircraft.Heating and cooling requirementsCooling air As per ARINC 600 Section 3.5.1.6 (220 kg/(kWhr)Flow rate 88 kg/hr (194 lbs/hr) at air temperature 40ºCPressure drop 5 ± 3 mm (0.20 ± 0.12 in.) of H2OFrequency band Tx: 1626.5 to 1660.5 MHzRx: 1525.0 to 1559.0 MHzReceive input impedance 50 ohmsTransmit output impedance 50 ohmsTransmit VSWR 2:1 maximumExternal interfaces   External parameters Table 1-1  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Characteristics and Specifications (Continued)Characteristic Specification
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 1-73 JUN 10Antenna gain (HGA) Minimum: 12 dBMaximum: 17 dBAntenna to DLNA loss Maximum: 0.3 dBDLNA gain Minimum: 53 dBMaximum: 60 dBDLNA noise Maximum: 1.8 dBDLNA to HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal total loss Minimum: 6 dBMaximum: 25 dB (Rx)HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to antenna loss Minimum: 1 dBMaximum: 2.5 dB (Tx) (including DLNA loss)DLNA insertion loss Maximum: 0.8 dB   External digital interfacesControl interface up to three MCDU (speed configurable)two CMUsMulti-control busTop/Port and Starboard antenna busTop/Port and Starboard antenna mutetwo IRS buses—second port speed configurableRS-232 maintenance interface (rear and front connector) 19 200 kbps (For connection specification, refer to "Maintenance Port Interface" on page 1-17)Ethernet user interface (2) 10BASE-T input and output for SCPC (Swift 64 Mobile ISDN) and MPDS using Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE)Used for placing PPPoE calls using the MPDS, SCPC, SBB PS, SBB CS servicesControls BGAN secondary contexts via the side AT handlerProvides status information to the client system using SNMPISDN () ISDN S/T physical interface supporting up to six external connections to Terminal Adapter (TA) or Terminal Equipment (TE) devicesOne ISDN interface to high-speed data servicesPOTS tip/ring interface (2) POTS analog interface provides access to services over Swift 64 or SBBCEPT-E1 Provides priority 4 (public) calls to the cabin over the Aero H+ service4-Wire interfaces Providing cockpit voice services through the audio control panel over Aero-H+ services Table 1-1  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Characteristics and Specifications (Continued)Characteristic Specification
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 1-83 JUN 10Table 1-2 lists the RTCA/DO-160E environmental characteristics for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals. Table 1-2  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal RTCA/DO-160E Environmental Characteristics Section Environmental Condition Category/Comment4Temperature and Altitude4.5.1 Ground Survival Low F24.5.1 Short Time Operating Low F24.5.2 Operating Low Temperature F24.5.3 Ground Survival High Temperature F24.5.3 Short Term Operating High Temperature F24.5.4 Operating High Temperature F24.5.5 In Flight Loss of Cooling Z—Operate for 30 minutes @40ºC with 10W Output RF power and 180 minutes @40C without damage and without producing smoke or fire4.6.1 Altitude Test F24.6.2 Decompression Test A2—Modified to include an extra test of 4 hours at 10,000 ft.4.6.3 Over Pressure Test A25Temperature Variation A6Humidity B7Operational Shock and Crash Safety B—Modified to include an extra test after the 5th cycle8Vibration S (CURVE B, C)—equipment exposed to 1 hour curve C (unpowered) prior to testing with curve B.9Explosive Atmosphere E—Modified to test at 0 ft and 41000 ft.10 Waterproofness W11 Fluids Susceptibility Y12 Sand and Dust S13 Fungus Resistance F14 Salt Spray S15 Magnetic Effect Z16 Power Input16.5 Power Input (ac) A(WF)H16.5.1.1 Normal Operating Conditions A(WF)H16.5.1.2 Voltage Modulation A(WF)16.5.1.3 Frequency Modulation A(WF)16.5.1.4 Momentary Power Interruptions A(WF)16.5.1.5 Transient/Voltage Surge—Normal A(WF)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 1-93 JUN 1016.5.1.6 Normal Frequency Variation, 360 Hz to 800 Hz A(WF)16.5.1.7 DC Content A(WF)16.5.1.8 Voltage Distortion A(WF)16.5.2.1 Abnormal Operating Condition A(WF)16.5.2.2 Abnormal Frequency and Voltage Condition A(WF)16.5.2.3 Transient/Voltage Surge—Abnormal A(WF)16 Power Input (dc) Z16.6 Normal Operating Conditions A16.6.1.1 Emergency Operation A16.6.1.1 Ripple Voltage A16.6.1.3 Momentary Power Interruptions A16.6.1.4 Normal Surge Voltage A16.6.2.1 Abnormal Operating Conditions A16.6.2.3 Momentary Undervoltage Operation A (No damage)16.6.2.4 Abnormal Surge Voltage Z16.7.1 Current Harmonic Emissions from Loads (ac) A(WF)H17 Voltage Spike A—600 V, and repeated at 1000 V18 Audio Frequency Conducted SusceptibilityPower Input (115 V ac) K(NF)Power Input (28 V dc) Z19 Induced Signal Susceptibility (ac) ZWInduced Signal Susceptibility (dc) ZC20 Radio Frequency Susceptibility RR21 Emission of RF Energy M22 Lightning Induced Transient Susceptibility A3J33 23 Lightning Direct Effects X24 Icing X25 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) A —Modified to apply 4kV to all connector pins connecting to other equipment26 Fire Flammability C—Modified to include compliance with 14 CFR (FAR) 25.853a and 25.869(a) including amendment 25-72 Table 1-2  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal RTCA/DO-160E Environmental Characteristics Section Environmental Condition Category/Comment
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 1-103 JUN 104. System InterfacesThis section briefly describes the external HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal system interfaces required to control, monitor, maintain, and supplement the terminal. "Installation" on page 3-1 provides a detailed description of interface connections.Figure 1-3 shows the system interfaces of the HSD-440 Stand-Alone terminal.Figure 1-3  HSD-440Stand-Alone Terminal InterfacesA. Central Maintenance Computer (CMC)The CMC can include a video display system and keyboard or it can interface with a separate multi-purpose control display system, such as an MCDU. The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal supports CMC interfaces defined in ARINC 741 Part 1 Appendix 1, with minor customization as required.The CMC receives BITE data using the standard ARINC 429 maintenance words from all subsystems attached to it. In turn, the CMC broadcasts data, such as time, date, flight number, flight phase, and aircraft ID, that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals attached to it can use to log events.The CMC enables you to query the equipment attached to it for BITE data and control the systems attached to it.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 1-113 JUN 10For more information about using the CMC, refer to the CMC manufacturer’s documentation.B. Source Destination Identification (SDI)The SDI is strapped to indicate the installation type.C. FWD IDs, ICAO IDs, and IMSIThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses two 24-bit IDs called Forward/Return Link Pairs (FRLPs) for the Swift 64 service: a Forward ID (FWD ID) and a Return ID (RTN ID). The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal reads the FWD ID from the EEPROM and performs a look-up for the RTN ID. The terminal obtains the second FRLP from the table based on the first FRLP. For security reasons, each assembly contains an encrypted look-up table with the whole addressing space assigned to the product by Inmarsat. To minimize the risk of unauthorized use of its contents, the table is not accessible to the user.The ISN consists of the type approval number and the FWD ID address. Each FRLP is associated with Inmarsat Mobile Numbers (IMNs), which are the numbers that a user dials from the ground to reach a terminal on an aircraft. There is a unique IMN for each of the service types (for example, data or voice).The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal provides IMEI and IMSI for SBB. The IMEI identifies the equipment type to the network . The equipment types identity is hard coded in the equipment. The IMSI identifies the subscriber. This identity is contained within the USIM housed in the SCM.The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal provides two ways to define the ICAO ID—by strapping or over the secondary IRS bus. You can select strapping or the IRS bus as the source of the ICAO ID by the secure ORT parameter ICAO CODE SOURCE.NOTE: If the ICAO address source is set to the IRS bus, the secondary IRS type ORT parameter must be set to AES ID.The 24-bit ICAO ID forms part of the Inmarsat Serial Number (ISN).The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) number for access to SBB services. The IMSI is stored in the terminal’s SIM card, and is printed on the SCM. Register your IMSI with your service provider to begin using SBB services.D. Weight-On-Wheel (WOW) Pin WiringWOW discretes indicate when an aircraft is on the ground or in the air, and are used for flight data-logging purposes. Since data that the aircraft is airborne is supplied to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal by other equipment, this information from the discretes is not required. However, EMS Aviation recommends wiring the WOW discretes if you plan to load software while the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is installed in the aircraft.WOW is only used to determine aircraft on-ground status if the Inertial Reference System (IRS) has no valid data, and the CMC is not installed, or if the CMC is not providing valid data.Note 40 of the ARINC 741 specification documentation defines the requirement for WOW data.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 1-123 JUN 10E. IRS ARINC 429 InterfaceThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal supports two IRS inputs and three types of labels: •Inertial •GNSS • HybridTable 1-3, Table 1-4, and Table 1-5 list the labels for both primary and secondary IRS inputs.NOTE: The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal does not process the equipment ID label. Table 1-3  Inertial Type Labels Label Type Priority Name LabelLatitude N/A AIRCRAFT_LATITUDE 310Longitude N/A AIRCRAFT_LONGITUDE 311Ground speed N/A AIRCRAFT_GROUND_SPEED 312True track N/A AIRCRAFT_TRUE_TRAK 313True heading N/A AIRCRAFT_HEADING 314Pitch angle N/A AIRCRAFT_PITCH 324Roll angle N/A AIRCRAFT_ROLL 325Altitude N/A AIRCRAFT_ALTITUDE 361Other N/A EQUIPMENT_ID 377 Table 1-4  GNSS Type Labels Label Type Priority Name LabelLatitude N/A GNSS_LATITUDE 110Longitude N/A GNSS_LONGITUDE 111Ground speed N/A GNSS_GROUND_SPEED 112True track N/A GNSS_TRUE_TRAK 103Altitude 1GNSS_ALTITUDE_370 3702GNSS_ALTITUDE_76 76Other N/A GNSS_SENSOR_STATUS_WORD 273N/A HDOP_WORD 101N/A EQUIPMENT_ID 377
 Table 1-5  Hybrid Type Labels Label Type Priority Name LabelLatitude 1HYBRID_LATITUDE 2542GNSS_LATITUDE 110Longitude 1HYBRID_LONGITUDE 2552GNSS_LONGITUDE 111Ground speed 1HYBRID_GROUND_SPEED 1752GNSS_GROUND_SPEED 112True track 1HYBRID_TRUE_TRAK 1372GNSS_TRUE_TRAK 103True heading 1HYBRID_HEADING_132 1322AIRCRAFT_HEADING 314Pitch angle N/A AIRCRAFT_PITCH 324Roll angle N/A AIRCRAFT_ROLL 325Altitude 1HYBRID_ALTITUDE_261 2612GNSS_ALTITUDE_76 76Other N/A HDOP_WORD 101N/A GNSS_SENSOR_STATUS_WORD 273N/A EQUIPMENT_ID 377SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 1-133 JUN 10The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses the navigation data according to the following priority rules: • For all labels other than Altitude, hybrid labels have the highest priority, followed by GNSS and inertial labels. • For Altitude labels, the highest priority label is 370, followed by 261, 75, and 361. • If both buses have the same label and label type, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal control processor uses the 429 bus source of one of the labels as long as the label is present and valid.The secondary IRS port set to AES ID mode provides the ICAO ID. Table 1-6 lists the AES ID type labels.
 Table 1-6  AES ID Type LabelsName LabelICAO Part 1 275ICAO Part 2  276SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 1-143 JUN 10F. Antenna InterfaceThe HSD-440 Mark 2 terminal interfaces to any mechanically-steered, conformal-array, or phased-array antenna subsystems that are compatible with ARINC 741 and 781. The antenna-pointing commands and status messages are communicated between the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and antenna subsystem over ARINC 429, multi-control, top/port and/or starboard BITE and HPA mute buses, as defined in ARINC 741, Part 1.HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals support high gain antennas.HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals do not support the third MCDU when a side-mount antenna is installed.G. CMUEach HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can be connected to up to two ARINC 724B/758 CMUs. A CMU is a general purpose instrument used to create and direct low data rate messages to different ground-based systems, including airline headquarters and operations. The CMU also provides access to Aero H/H+ PRT channels.The CMUs operate in two modes: it can select from a number of Satellite Service Providers rather than Inmarsat only, or it can operate with no preferred Satellite Service Provider.The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal exchanges information with the CMU over ARINC 429 interfaces. The default speed is low, but you can set the speed of the buses to high through the ORT.H. Antenna Subsystem RF InterfaceThe system RF parameters, such as cable losses and antenna gain, are delimited to make sure that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal performance requirements are met. Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for a definition of these parameters and their expected values.5. User InterfacesThis section describes the HSD-440 interfaces that enable users to access Inmarsat services and monitor the operation of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.A. MCDUThe MCDU is a device that uses an ARINC 429 interface per ARINC 739, which lets you communicate with individual instruments on an aircraft, including the Flight Management System (FMS), very high frequency (VHF) radio, and the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. You can make air-to-air and air-to-ground voice calls with the MCDU. You can also use the MCDU to answer ground-to-air and air-to-air voice calls.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 1-153 JUN 10The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal supports three MCDUs. B. WSCThe WSC is a device that uses an ARINC 429 interface per ARINC 741 Part 2 Attachment 2F-42.1, which provides display functions similar to the MCDU. For more information about the WSC, see the WSC manufacturer’s documentation and ARINC 741 Part 2 Attachment 2F-42.1.C. Remote ResetThe remote reset output provides an external reset function for the complete HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. Pressing the momentary normally open (NO) switch resets the system's processor-card circuitry.The remote reset has the same function as pressing the test button on the front panel of the terminal.D. ISDN Circuit-Switched Data InterfaceHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals connect to a variety of interface options. The physical interface for ISDN BRI service is EURO S/T, which supports several types of connections to user equipment.HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals provide one ISDN S/T bus interface which is capable of hosting up to six external physical connections to EURO ISDN devices.The ISDN BRI S/T bus accesses only the Swift 64/SBB channel card. In SBB mode, the interface provides one SBB circuit-switched connection. In Swift 64 mode, the interface provides two Swift 64 circuit-switched connections. If the channel is busy or in-call, the request for service is denied.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 1-163 JUN 10Figure 1-4  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ISDN ConnectionsYou can install RJ45 interface connectors in the cabin area to facilitate connection to the ISDN interface. Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for a description of the RJ45 connector and cable termination.E. Ethernet Data InterfacesHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals provide two Ethernet data interfaces. Each Ethernet port provides a 10 Mbps access with a 10BASE-T physical interface. The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal data I/O controller takes the PPP data stream and directs it to the required port on the channel card, depending on the type of service selected by the user. PPPoE is required on the user equipment to allow the establishment of virtual connections to either service. You can use the Ethernet ports for either Mobile ISDN or MPDS service when operating in Swift 64 mode, or PS (background or streaming) or CS (Mobile ISDN) when operating in SBB modeThe Ethernet interface also provides access to equipment monitoring functions through SNMP, and to the side AT handler for control of secondary contexts in SBBF. POTS Tip/Ring InterfacesThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal includes two POTS analog interfaces that connect to the Swift 64/SBB channel card. The default setting for POTS port 1 is 64 kbps Speech, and the default setting for POTS port 2 is 3.1 kbps Audio, which is appropriate for fax calls.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 1-173 JUN 10G. CEPT-E1 InterfaceThe CEPT-E1 interface provides access to a maximum of two calls through Aero H+ voice services. The CEPT-E1 interface connects to standard ITU or ARINC 746-compliant equipment. Users can select the equipment through an ORT parameter.H. Maintenance Port InterfaceThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is equipped with a maintenance port, located on the front panel of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, with remote access also available through the rear ARINC 600 connector. If the ports on both the front and back panels are connected, the front-panel connection has priority and the back-panel connection does not function.The maintenance port provides the physical connection to a password-protected MPU that provides a system interface for users or service personnel who need to upgrade, monitor, or troubleshoot the system. The user connects to the maintenance port either through the maintenance 25-pin socket D-Sub (DB25) connector on the front panel of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal or through a remote 9-pin socket D-Sub (DE9) connector via the ARINC 600 connector, as described in "Connection Requirements" on page 4-37.A standard VT100 compatible terminal or computer (PC/laptop) running an emulator program such as HyperTerminal©, ProComm (PCPLUS)©, or another serial communication package provides the user interface to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU. Configure the connection as follows:  • Bits per second—19200 • Data bits—8 • Parity—none • Stop bits—1 • Flow control—noneThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal supports two different end user access levels within the maintenance port architecture: End User and Field Representative.(1) End User Access: Level 1Password: menuThis limited-access level is for anyone without technical training on the product. It provides read-only access to help users diagnose problems with the assistance of product support personnel.(2) Field Representative Access: Level 2Password: maintThis level is for trained installers and product support personnel. This access level supports read and limited write capabilities. Users are able to disable/mask/clear faults, change satellite or LES/GES preferences, view and modify certain EEPROM parameters, and perform other maintenance or upgrade functions.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 1-183 JUN 10"Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-35 provides a detailed description of the two levels of user access and the menus, report selections, functions, and system diagnostic procedures of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU.I. Fault Indicator LEDTable 1-7 provides a description of the fault indicator LED functions. Table 1-7  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal LED Output Designations LED SignalLabel Color Indication Description LED1 Power On Green Normal operation: on.HPA output is greater than 30dBm: flashes at 1 Hz.Power on: HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal supply voltage is active. Self-test: flashes at 1 Hz alternately with the Fault LED.LED2 Fault Red Fault: Fault condition as described in "Fault Indicator LED" on page 1-18.Self-test: flashes once per second alternately with the Power On LED.A failure in the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal may be due to a number of fault conditions. When fault condition is detected, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal activates a red, Fault LED. Some of the potential fault conditions are: •CP RAM • CP Application code CRC • CC power up •CP D-UART • CP ARINC Chipset • PSU Power rail • Previous Power Up CP RAM • PSU Over temperature • OCXO Warmup • PA Over Current • PA Voltage Driver • PA Over temperature shutdown • PA 12VDC STATUS DISCRETE • SDU Configuration Module • CP Boot Code CRC • DIO Boot
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 1-193 JUN 10 • VP RAM • VP Application Code CRC • VP Kernel • VP 4-Wire or POTS COM • VP 4-Wire #1 • VP 4-wire #2J. Self-TestThe self-test button activates the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal self-test.The self-test button resets the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal performs a POST when the self-test button is pressed for over ten seconds.K. Remote Status Panel (Optional)In HSD-440 Stand-Alone terminals, the outputs to the optional remote status panel provide a visual indication of the operational status of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal—they mirror the front panel LEDs labeled as Power (LED1) and Fault (LED2). Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed installation and circuit requirements.6. Software DescriptionThis section describes the software specifications and operational software components of HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals.A. Software SpecificationsHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal software meets the following DO-178B standards: • SBB to Level E • Swift 64 to Level  • Classic Aero voice and data to Level DB. Operational Software Part NumbersTable 1-8 provides a list of software part numbers for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals. Table 1-8  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Operational Software HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Part Number EMS Aviation Part Number Description1252-A-3800-01 LI-1252-38015 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal firmware assembly
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 1-203 JUN 10C. Owner Requirements Table (ORT)The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal includes an ORT that stores information relevant to the operation of the terminal. The ORT is divided into two parts: secure and user. The secured partition contains those items that are installation-dependent and crucial to the proper operation of the satellite communication system. End users cannot modify these parameters.The user partition includes items that aircraft operators can modify, such as 4-wire headset speaker volume.You can use the EMS ORT Application to change ORT parameters and to create ORT files on your computer. You can then load the ORT file to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal through TFTP on an Ethernet connection. You can load the same ORT file to various HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals in your fleet. Section "2. Configuring ORT Parameters Using the EMS ORT Application" on page 6-32 provides more information about the EMS ORT Application.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-13 JUN 10SYSTEM OPERATIONThis section provides basic information on registering and operating HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals, including the following sections: • Registering and Activating Terminals • Configuring Terminals • Using Terminals1. Registering and Activating TerminalsRegistering and activating HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals has the following steps: • Preparing Terminal Information • Obtaining ICAO Addresses • Choosing Service Providers • Registering TerminalsA. Preparing Terminal InformationBefore installing the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, obtain an ISN and identify the Swift 64 terminal type and service category.(1) Obtaining ISNsHoneywell provides ISNs for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal based on the intended installation configuration. The last six digits of the ISN form the Forward ID.When requesting ISNs, have the following information available: • End customer name, including contact information • The part number of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal • Tail registration number, aircraft type, and serial number of the aircraft on which the terminal is being installed • Serial number of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals • Intended installation configuration mode(2) Identifying the Swift 64 Service Category and Terminal TypeInmarsat divides the band of frequencies assigned to Swift 64 high-speed data into two separate categories: Category A and Category B. Category B frequencies are restricted to those that do not overlap with Aero H/H+ frequency allocations. HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals do not require restricted frequency allocations. Register HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals as Category A systems.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-23 JUN 10The Swift 64 terminal type for all modes of HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals is 76HW07. Currently, supported service types for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals operating Swift 64 are: • 64 kbps speech • 3.1 kHz audio • 56 kbps data • 64 kbps UDI • AMBE voice •MPDSB. Obtaining ICAO AddressesObtain your ICAO address from your local aeronautical authority. Your service provider will require this address when you register.C. Choosing Service ProvidersContact Inmarsat for an up-to-date list of Inmarsat Service Providers using the following contact information: Inmarsat 99 City Road, London EC1Y 1AXTel: +44 20 7728 1000 Fax: +44 20 728 1044Customer Care Tel: +44 20 7728 1777  Fax: +44 20 7728 1142 Email: customer_care@inmarsat.comWeb address: www.inmarsat.comD. Registering TerminalsContact your Inmarsat service provider and ask for a registration for service activation of Aircraft Earth Station form. With this form, you can register for Swift 64, SBB, and Aero H+ services. The services available depend on your service provider.To complete the registration form you need the following information:  • Customer information (address and contact information) • Service provider details (obtained from your ISP) • System and terminal information (terminal type, manufacturer, model number, serial number of terminal) • ICAO 24 bit technical address for Aero H+ services • ISN for Swift 64 services • IMEI and IMSI (printed on the SCM label) for SBB services
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-33 JUN 10 • Aircraft information (tail number, fuselage/airframe number, manufacturer and model, and country of registration) • List of services required (for example, Swift 64 Mobile ISDN, Aero H+ data-2, SBB PS and SBB CS services)NOTE: When requesting a logon class, you must request Class 3, even if your installation does not support data services. The channel card software does not support Class 2.2. Configuring TerminalsThis section provides basic information on how to configure HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals for operation with user devices.A. Setting up Airborne NetworksFor information about setting up airborne networks that use Swift 64 and SBB services, refer to the HSD Terminal Developer’s Guide, MN-1252-13005.B. Mapping User Devices for ISDN ServicesHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals support connection to a multitude of user devices, allowing the user to customize their system. The HSD Terminal Developer’s Guide, MN-1252-13005, provides more information about ISDN devices and services.C. IMNsIMNs are unique routing numbers that act similarly to telephone numbers. IMNs are assigned by Inmarsat to each service type (64 kbps Speech, 3.1 kHz Audio, 56 kbps data, and 64 kbps data).When registering your system, request IMNs for each service-type device attached to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal on the Service Activation form. Although the service provider may support an unlimited number of IMNs assigned to a particular system, the number of physical connections available on a system defines the number of IMNs supported.NOTE: To get assigned extra or multiple IMNs per service type, you must request them from your service provider when filling out your service registration and application form.The HSD Terminal Developer’s Guide, MN-1252-13005, provides more information about IMNs.D. MSNsMSNs act as identification and routing codes for user devices attached to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ISDN bus. MSNs identify the device on the system so that incoming calls route to the appropriate device. Each device must be assigned an appropriate MSN to identify to the Inmarsat system what type of service that device needs on outgoing calls. The MSNs also provide routing information for incoming calls.The HSD Terminal Developer’s Guide, MN-1252-13005, provides more information about MSNs.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-43 JUN 10E. Configuring User ORT Parameters with the Maintenance Port Utility (MPU)You can use the MPU to configure user-level parameters in the ORT. This feature will be available in a future release.F. Configuring Secure ORT Parameters with the Maintenance Port Utility (MPU)You can use the MPU to configure secure-level parameters in the ORT.The Forward ID is a secure ORT parameter that you must configure in order to use Swift 64 services. Refer to section "K: Configuring Satellite Service ORT Parameters" on page 6-15.G. Creating ORTs with the Maintenance Port Utility (MPU) can use the MPU to configure the ORT. Refer to "Configuring the Owners Requirements Table (ORT)" on page 6-1 for instructions.H. Understanding CMU MessagesThe CMU communicates with the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using two types of ARINC 429 messages: Broadcast messages and Bit Oriented Protocol (BOP) messages. Both types of communication are supported at the same time.Appendix F: “CMU Messages” on page F-1 includes descriptions of the messages that the CMU will transmit to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and receive from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.I.  Configuring Swift 64 LES Access CodesThis section describes how to configure the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal with the LES Access Codes provided by your Inmarsat service provider to support Swift 64 service. Configure LES access codes only if you plan to use Swift 64 services. This configuration is not required for SBB or classic services.NOTE: You can remove the label that covers the LES Access Codes LEDs once you have configured the LES Access Codes.(1) General Overview ISPs operate LESs. The ISPs are typically public telephone companies of the country where the LES is located.Using satellite communications antennas and up-and-downlink communications equipment, the LES converts the space segment to a format compatible with public and private telephone and data networks. Each satellite is associated with a number of LESs that fall within its coverage.Inmarsat assigns each LES an access code. These access codes are used by the Inmarsat system to route calls to the correct OR satellite and LES. NOTE: HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals are shipped with the factory default LES Access Codes set to 0 (zero). All HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals must be configured with the valid LES Access Codes provided by your ISP.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-53 JUN 10(2) Changing Default LESs Using the MPUThe LES Access Codes can be configured using the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU. You can access the MPU by connecting a computer running a VT100 terminal emulation program to the RS-232 maintenance port on the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals. Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-35 for connection settings and cabling information). NOTE: When configuring the LES Access Codes using the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU, the application requests the input of a Secondary LES Access Code. At the time of writing, Inmarsat has not implemented the recognition of the secondary LES value in their systems. However, a valid Secondary LES Access Code must be entered in the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. The Secondary LES Access Code must be the same as the Primary LES Access Code. Inmarsat usually provides LES Access Codes for the ISPs providing Swift 64 services. Contact Inmarsat directly for an up to date list of LES and Swift 64 service providers. For more information, visit Inmarsat's Web site at www.inmarsat.com or contact their Customer Care Service at:Telephone: +44 20 7728 1777 Fax:  +44 20 7728 1142E-mail: customer_care@inmarsat.com Table 2-1  Inmarsat Swift 64 LES Operator and Access Codes Land Earth Station Operator  Country  OR AOR-E AOR-W IOR PORTelenor Satellite Services Inc. USA 001 001 001 001Stratos UK/Canada 002 002 002 002Stratos (Auckland LES)Xantic (Burum LES)Xantic (Perth LES)New ZealandNetherlandsAustralia 012 012 012 012(a) Equipment RequiredYou need the following to change the default LES Access Code in an HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal:  • Computer • Terminal emulation program (e.g., HyperTerminal)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-63 JUN 10(b) Connecting to the Maintenance PortTo connect to the maintenance port: • Connect a computer running a terminal emulation program to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal maintenance port, and then power up the system. (Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-35 for detailed connection information.)(c) Changing LES Access Codes Using the Control Processor SoftwareTo change all of the LES Access Codes simultaneously to the same LES Access Code: 1. Connect to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal maintenance port. 2. Type the password maint. 3. To navigate to Menu 3, press CTRL + N. 4. In Menu 3, press i. 5. Follow the application prompts, and enter the LES Access Code.The Menu 3, option i configures the Primary and Secondary LES Access Codes for all of the ORs to the same LES Access Code. NOTE: In cases where the Service Provider requires different LES Access Codes for different ORs, each LES Access Code must be programmed individually using Menu 3, item P.(d) Changing LES Access Codes on a Call-by-Call BasisTo change the LES Access Code on a call-by-call basis: • Dial the 901 prefix before your dial sequence:901 + LES CODE + International Code + Country Code + Area Code + Telephone Number + POUND KEYExample: 901 + 012 + 00 + 1+ 613+5551212 + #NOTE: The call connects only if the service is authorized by the LES. To obtain LES codes, call your Swift 64 service provider.J. Removing the LED LabelA label covers the LES Access Codes LEDs. You can remove this label once you have configured the LES Access Codes.K. Activating ConfigurationsAfter you configure the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal parameters, you must rest the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using one of the following methods: • In Menu 2, press z • Cycle the power to the HSD-440 Mark 2 TerminalWhen the reset or restart is completed, the configuration values and parameters are activated.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-73 JUN 10L. Verifying ConfigurationsThis section describes how to view the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal configuration parameters. To view the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ORT system configuration: 1. In Menu 3, press o.The List ORT appears. 2. To scroll through the listing until you see a table of ORT ORs, press o.The LES Access Codes are listed in this table.3. Using TerminalsThis section describes how to perform the following tasks: • Placing Swift 64 Voice, SwiftBroadband, and Fax Calls • Placing Calls with the CEPT-E1 Interface • Using Data Connections • Operating the MCDU • Operating the WSC • Performing Cockpit Communications with the MCDUA. Placing Swift 64 Voice, SwiftBroadband, and Fax CallsPlacing voice and fax calls using the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is similar to placing an international telephone call or entering a telephone number for dial-up networking data calls. Like international telephone numbers, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal dialing-number-sequence includes different routing components or codes. Figure 2-1 illustrates the required order of the dialing components.Figure 2-1  Dialing-Sequence Components
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-83 JUN 10Each dialing sequence component serves a different routing function: • Dial Code Prefix:Use service-specific dial code prefixes when sending a fax or using analog modems, or for overriding system defaults to force the system to request a specific service type. Figure 2-1 uses the dial code prefix for 3.1 KHz audio service type (*82*). See Table 2-2 for other dial code prefixes. • International Access Code:The international access code for all airborne equipment is 00.  • Country Code:Use the Public Switch Telephone Network (PSTN) number assigned to the country of your call destination. • Area Code (and City Code, if applicable):Use the PSTN routing number assigned to the area (and if applicable, city) of your call destination.  • POUND SIGN (#):To signal the system to send the call, at the end of the telephone dial string, press or enter POUND SIGN (#). Certain devices using the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal may not have the function to insert the POUND SIGN (#) at the end of the dialing sequence. For those devices, additional dial code prefixes are required to override the send command requirement. Refer to Table 2-3 for more information.(1) Dial Code PrefixesAlthough the system automatically selects the appropriate service types on outgoing calls for ISDN devices, a dial code prefix is required to send a fax, identify an analogue modem, or force the system to override the system defaults to select a specific service type (see Table 2-2). Table 2-2  Dial Code Prefixes for Forcing Service Type Selection Service Type Service Description Dial Code Prefix (Forces service selection)Swift 64 PrefixesSpeech 64 kbps High-speed voice *81* or none3.1 kHz audio Fax, analogue modem, STU-III, STE *82*56 kbps data High-speed data *85*64 kbps data High-speed data *84*
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-93 JUN 10The system requires the dial code prefix *82* for sending faxes or when using analogue modems. It forces the system to request the required 3.1 kHz audio service from the Inmarsat Satellite Communications Network. If required, use the dial code prefixes to override the system defaults for selecting specific service types. Dial code prefixes for all service types require an asterisk (*) before and after the code number.Other dial code prefixes provide system overrides required if you are using devices that cannot add a POUND SIGN (#) to the dialing string or devices that are slow dialing. Table 2-2 provides a description of the additional dial code prefixes used for system overrides. Table 2-1 provides a list of the LESs and their associated codes.SBB PrefixesSpeech 64 kbps N/A3.1 kHz audio Fax, analogue modem, STU-III, STE *82* or none56 kbps data High-speed data *83*64 kbps data High-speed data *84*Speech (AMBE+2) *80* or none Table 2-2  Dial Code Prefixes for Forcing Service Type Selection (Continued)Service Type Service Description Dial Code Prefix (Forces service selection)
 Table 2-3  Dial Code Prefixes for System Overrides Reason for Override Dial Code Prefix Example Dialing SequenceUse this dial code prefix to override the default LES/GES configured in the system.This dial code prefix signals the system to override the default LES/GES and use the selected LES/GES instead. (See Figure 2-2 or contact Inmarsat for Swift 64 LES/GES codes)901 + LES/GES CODE901 + LES/GES CODE + International Code + Country Code + Area Code + Telephone Number + POUND KEY 901 + 002 + 00 + 1+ 613 +5551212 + POUND KEYUse with fast (e.g. automated) dialing devices that cannot produce or add a POUND SIGN to end the dialing sequence.This dial code prefix signals the system to send the call after a specified delay in user input when the POUND SIGN cannot be entered (about 4 seconds).902902 + International Code + Country Code + Area Code + Telephone Number902 + 00 + 1+ 613 + 5551212Use with slow (e.g. manual) dialing devices that cannot produce or add a POUND SIGN to end the dialing sequence. This dial code prefix signals the system to send the call after a specified delay in user input (about 20 seconds).903903 + International Code + Country Code + Area Code + Telephone Number 903 + 00 + 1+ 613 + 5551212 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-103 JUN 10(2) Mobile-to-Mobile CommunicationThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal provides a two-way link for aircraft-to-aircraft communication. Calling aircraft-to-aircraft requires additional information. You need to know the IMN of the device or service on the aircraft you are calling.Figure 2-2 illustrates the Mobile-to-Mobile dialing sequence.Figure 2-2  Mobile-to-Mobile Dialing Sequence
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-113 JUN 10B. Placing Calls with the CEPT-E1 InterfaceHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal CEPT-E1 interface provides Cabin Telecommunication Unit (CTU) access to two Aero-H+ 4800 bps AMBE voice calls simultaneously. Since the CEPT-E1 interface shares the Aero H+ voice channels with the cockpit, CTU calls maybe preempted from either the air or ground by higher priority calls.Air-to-ground and ground-to-air calls over the CEPT-E1 interface are priority 4 (public) calls.For information on how to place a call over the CEPT-E1 interface, see the CTU documentation.C. Using Data ConnectionsFor information about data connections, optimizing your airborne network and selecting the service that best meets your needs, refer to the HSD High-speed Data Terminal Developer’s Guide, MN-1252-13005.D. Operating the MCDUThis section provides information about the MCDU and its interfaces—output and input ports, the screen, and the keyboard.(1) Output PortsThe MCDU transfers its identification and commands to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using 32 bit words and a 12-14.5 kbps output port, as defined in ARINC Specification 429, Digital Information Transfer System (DITS).(2) Input PortsThe MCDU receives identification information and displays data from individual subsystems using seven input ports, as defined by ARINC Specification 429. Ports 1 and 2 are reserved for FMSs, and they operate at 100 kbps. Ports 3 to 7 are available for the MCDU to communicate with the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, and they operate at 12-14.5 kbps.(3) ScreenThe MCDU displays all data on the screen, as shown in Figure 2-3.
1SATCOM MA I N  MENU1L 3 1RSAT 1 AVA I LABLE PR I2L 5*MAKE CAL L 3 2R00161356012433L 73RSA T 2 I NCOM I NG CA L L4L 9*ANSWER CA L L REJ ECT * 4RPUBL I C5L 11 E5R6L 13 <SUBMENU D I RECTORY> 6RSYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-123 JUN 10Figure 2-3  MCDU ScreenThe top of the screen displays the title of the menu on the screen. The bottom of the screen (Line 14) is the scratchpad that displays information that you enter on the keyboard.The MCDU has six buttons on each side of the screen that activate MCDU functions. Figure 2-3 displays these buttons on the left and right sides of the screen. When the functions corresponding to a button are available, the function’s name appears beside the button—for example, in  Figure 2-3, ANSWER CALL and REJECT (a call) are available functions for the incoming call on SAT 2.Other lines on the MCDU screen display information relevant to the function or status of the HSD-440. In Figure 2-3, line 6 displays the phone number the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal will dial when the user presses the MAKE CALL button, and the number 3 under PRI in row 5 indicates that the priority of the outgoing call is 3.(4) KeyboardThe MCDU’s keyboard includes a set of numeric keys and a set of alphabetic keys, both of which you can use to enter data into the MCDU.The keyboard may include preset keys, such as the following: • The IDX or MAIN MENU key: this key returns you to the MCDU’s main menu. • The CLR key: this key clears any text you type into the scratchpad. • The NEXT PAGE key: this key brings up the next page of a menu if one is available.(5) Special SymbolsBecause of space constraints on the screen, the MCDU uses a number of special symbols to indicate actions: • < and > appear at the far left or right to indicate that another menu page is available in that direction.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-133 JUN 10 • * appears at the far left or right to indicate that pressing that key results in an action. • NUMBER/NUMBER appears to tell you which page out of how many pages you are viewing. For example, 1/3 would appear when you are on page 1 of 3 pages in total. • [ and ] appear around empty data fields where you can enter data. However, entering data is not mandatory in these fields.(6) Navigating the MCDUThe MCDU includes a number of menus, as shown in Figure 2-4. There are four category pages in the address book and up to 25 pages (100 phone numbers) for each category.NOTE: The SATCOM CH 2 STAT menu is not present when the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is operating in SBB mode.Figure 2-4  MCDU Menus
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-143 JUN 10This section will help you perform the following tasks: • Viewing Flight Information • Logging On and Off • Viewing Channel Information • Configuring Headsets(7) Viewing Flight InformationYou can view the flight identification from the MCDU.To view flight information: 1. On the first page of the MCDU’s main menu, press the key next to SUBMENU.The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.SATCOM SUBMENU LOG-ON STATELOGGED - OF F<LOG-ON AERO CHANNELSTATUS>HSD CHANNELSTATUS>FLT ID12345 MA I NT ENANCE >RETURN>You can view the following information from this screen: • Flight identification on the line below FLT ID(8) Logging On and OffYou can use the MCDU to initiate a manual or automatic logon from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to the satellite network.The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal boot-up logon mode is specified in the Logon/Handover Policy in the ORT. You can set this parameter to automatic or manual. After the  terminal has finished the boot-up process, you can use the MCDU to log off (from an automatic logon) or to initiate a manual (constrained) logon. During an automatic logon, the system selects the most appropriate GES depending on HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal location.During a manual logon, you must select the GES. Even if the ORT parameter is configured for automatic logon, you can still constrain the terminal to logon using a particular GES.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-153 JUN 10(a) Viewing the Log StatusThe log status defines whether the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is currently logged on or logged off. The logon status can be: • Logged-Off—The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged off. • Logged-Off Inop—The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is configured to log on manually but the terminal is in an inoperable state. Clear all problems for the logon to continue. • Logged-Off Rejected—The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged on and a second logon attempt is made. The second attempt fails and the status is Logged-Off Rejected. • Logging-On Inop—The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is configured to log on automatically but the terminal is in an inoperable state. Clear all problems for the logon to continue. • Logged-On Constrained—The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged on manually. • Logged-On Auto—The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged on automatically. • Logging-off—TheHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is in the process of logging off. • Logging-on—The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is in the process of logging on.To view the log status: 1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears. The logon state appears on the line below LOG-ON STATE.You can view additional details about the logon, including the GES and satellite name. To view additional logon details: 1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears. 2. On the SUBMENU page, press the key next to LOG-ON.The SATCOM AERO LOG-ON screen appears as shown below. The logon state appears on the line below LOG-ON STATE. You can also view the GES name, satellite name, signal level, antenna type, azimuth and elevation, and 8-digit ICAO ID.NOTE: If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged off, the LOG-OFF option is not available. If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged on, the AUTO LOG-ON option is not available.(b) Initiating an Automatic LogonWhen the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal logs on automatically, it selects an appropriate GES and satellite based on its position.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-163 JUN 10To log on automatically: 1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears. 2. On the SUBMENU page, press the key next to LOG-ON.The SATCOM AERO LOG-ON page appears. 3. On the SATCOM AERO LOG-ON page, press the key next to AUTO LOG-ON.The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal logs on and the logon state is LOGGED-ON AUTO.NOTE: The AUTO LOG-ON key is not available if the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is already logged on.(c) Selecting a GES (Initiating a Constrained Logon)You can constrain the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to logon using a particular GES.If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged off, selecting a GES initiates a constrained log on (logon state is LOGGED-ON CONSTRAINED). If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is already logged on and you select a new GES, the MCDU displays the SATCOM AERO LOG-ON page and automatically logs off the old GES and logs on to the new GES. This also results in a constrained logon.To select a GES: 1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears. 2. On the SUBMENU page, press the key next to LOG-ON.The SATCOM AERO LOG-ON page appears. 3. On the SATCOM AERO LOG-ON page, press the key next to GES SEL.The GES SELECTION page appears.
GES SELECT I ON 1 / 3AORW*AUSSAGUEL / 005AORW*EIK / 002AORE*AUSSAGUEL / 103AORE*EIK / 104POR*PERTH / 205RETURN>SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-173 JUN 10 4. To select a GES, press the button next to the GES name.A logon confirmation (LOG-ON) appears at the bottom of the screen. 5. To log on to the new GES, press the key next to LOG-ON.(d) Logging OffYou can use the MCDU to initiate the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal logoff sequence.To log off: 1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears. 2. Press the key next to LOG-OFF.The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal logs off.(9) Viewing Channel InformationThere are three Aero channels and two Swift 64 channels, or one SwiftBroadband channel, available with the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. You can use the MCDU to view the following information about each of the channels: • Logon status (Aero channels only)—Logon status may be Valid or Invalid. • ORR status (Swift 64 channels only)—Ocean Region Registration (ORR) status may be Valid or Invalid. • Attach status (SwiftBroadband channels only)—Attach status may be Valid or Invalid. • Call Termination Code (CALL TERM) • Transmitter Effect Isotropic Radiated Power (TX EIRP) • Receiver carrier-to-noise ratio (RX C/NO) • Service type—Possible service types are: • AERO P/R/T • AERO VOICE •SWIFT64
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-183 JUN 10 • SBB (SwiftBroadband) • Number of bits transmitted per second (TX KBPS)—for Swift 64 MPDS or SBB background services, the number of bits being transmitted per second is expressed in kilobits per second (kbps).Otherwise, the number of bits transmitted is zero. • Number of bits received per second (RX KBPS)—for Swift 64 MPDS or SBB background services, the number of bits being received per second is expressed in kilobits per second (kbps). Otherwise, the number of bits received is zero. • Service information (CONNECTED)—For Aero service, service information includes the GES name and number. For GAN (Swift 64) service, service information includes the service provider number and name description. For SBB service, no information is provided. • Satellite ID (SAT)—Satellite ID includes the index number of each satellite, a mnemonic and abbreviated alphanumeric description, and the spot beam that theHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is currently using. (a) To view information about an Aero channel: 1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears. 2. On the SUBMENU page, press the key next to AERO CHANNEL STATUS.The SATCOM AERO STATUS page appears.SATCOM AERO  STATUS<CHAN 3 - ACARS DATA<CHAN 4 - AERO VO I CE<CHAN 5 - AERO VO I CERETURN> 3. On the SATCOM AERO STATUS page, press the key next to a channel.The SATCOM CH STAT page appears. (MCDU pages for Channel 3 and Channel 4 are shown below.)
SATCOM CH 3 STATLOGONWA I T  FOR P CHAN  SYNCCALL  TERM TX KBPS   0.00TX E I RP RX KBPS13 . 5  0 . 00RX C / N0 CONNECTED50 . 0 EIKSERV TYPE SATAERO P/R/T AORE B5RETURN>SATCOM CH 4 STATLOGONVAL I DCALL  TERM TX KBPS   0.00TX E I RP RX KBPS0.0  0.00RX C / N0 CONNECTED0.0 EIKSERV TYPE SATAERO VO I CE AORE B5RETURN>SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-193 JUN 10(b) To view information about a Swift 64 channel: 1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears. 2. On the SATCOM SUBMENU page, press the key next to HSD CHANNEL STATUS.The SATCOM HSD STATUS page appears.
SATCOM HSD STATUS<CHAN 1 - SWIFT64<CHAN 2 - SWIFT64RETURN>SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-203 JUN 10 3. On the SATCOM HSD STATUS page, press the key next to a Swift 64 channel.The SATCOM CH STAT page appears.SATCOM CH 1 STATORR S TA TREG I STER I NGCALL  TERM TX KBPS 0.00TX E I RP RX KBPS14 . 0  0 . 00RX C / N0 CONNECTED53 . 0 LES 1SERV TYPE SATSW IFT64 AORE  B5RETURN>(c) To view information about a SBB channel: 1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears. 2. On the SATCOM SUBMENU page, press the key next to HSD CHANNEL STATUS.The SATCOM HSD STATUS page appears.
SATCOMHSD STATUS <CHAN 1 - SBB  RETURN>SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-213 JUN 10 3. On the SATCOM HSD STATUS page, press the key next to the SBB channel.The SATCOM CH STAT page appears.SATCOM CH 1 STATATTACHYESCALL  TERM TX KBPS 0.00TX E I RP RX KBPS20 . 0  0 . 00RX C / N0 CONNECTED72 . 2SERV TYPE SATBGAN AORE  B5RETURN>(10)Viewing Maintenance InformationThe maintenance page provides information about: • Terminal status • Terminal part numbers(a) Viewing Terminal StatusTo view the terminal status: 1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears. 2. On the SATCOM SUBMENU page, press the key next to MAINTENANCE.The SATCOM MAINTENANCE page appears.
SATCOMMA I NTENANCESTATUSTERMI NAL TRANSMI TOK NORMAL<HEADSET CONF I G<PART NUMBERS RESET SATCOMSYSTEMNOT AVA I L - I N A I RRETURN>SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-223 JUN 10The maintenance menu displays the following information: • Terminal status on the line below TERMINAL—Terminal status may be OK or FAULT. • Transmit status on the line below TRANSMIT—Transmit status may be NORMAL or INHIBITED. • Air/Ground status on the line below RESET SATCOM SYSTEM—When set to ON GROUND, the system is on the ground and can be reset. When set to NOT AVAIL – IN AIR, the system is in the air and cannot be reset.(b) Viewing Terminal Part NumbersTo view terminal part numbers: 1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears. 2. On the SATCOM SUBMENU page, press the key next to MAINTENANCE.The SATCOM MAINTENANCE page appears.  3. On the SATCOM MAINTENACE page, press the key next to PART NUMBERS.The SATCOM PART NUMBERS page appears.The part numbers menu displays the following information: • HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal part number and version • HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal software load and version • 8-digit ICAO ID • 3-digit HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal serial number • 6-digit (hexadecimal) Forward IDs (FWD ID 1 and FWD ID 2)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-233 JUN 10 • 15-digit IMSI number(11)Configuring HeadsetsTo configure the headset(s): 1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.The SATCOM SUBMENU appears. 2. On the SATCOM SUBMENU page, press the key next to MAINTENANCE.The SATCOM MAINTENANCE page appears.  3. Press the key next to HEADSET CONFIG.The SATCOM HEADSET CONFIG page appears. NOTE: Toggle between the two 4-wire headsets by pressing the key next to SAT. When you toggle between headsets, the speaker, microphone, sidetone, and noise values are displayed for that headset.SATCOMHEADSET CONF I GSAT*DEFAULT 1 SPEAKER*DWN50 UP* M I CROPHONE*DWN 70 UP*S I DETONE*DWN50 UP* NO I SE*DWN-50 UP*RETURN> 4. To increase or decrease the speaker, microphone, sidetone, and noise insertion levels, press the keys next to DWN and UP. When you change either of the levels, a SAVE label appears at the bottom of the screen.NOTE: The speaker, microphone, and sidetone values move up and down by 5, and the noise value moves up and down through values -60, -50, -40, and OFF.NOTE: To reset all the settings to the default values, press the key next to DEFAULT. Default values are speaker (50), microphone (70), sidetone (50), and noise (-50). 5. To save the new levels, press the key next to SAVE.E. Operating the WSCThe WSC performs the same functions as the MCDU. For more information on operating the WSC, see the WSC manufacturer’s documentation and ARINC 741 Part 2 Attachment 2F-42.1.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-243 JUN 10F. Performing Cockpit Communications with the MCDUThis section provides instructions for making calls with the MCDU and 4-wire voice services available in the aircraft’s cockpit. The cockpit communications system operates with one or two headsets in the aircraft’s cockpit, depending on the operational mode.(1) Modes of OperationThe cockpit communication services are configured in one of two modes of operation before installation: Latched mode and Push-to-Talk (PTT) mode. These configurations are strapped at the terminal and cannot be changed without removing and rewiring the terminal.In PTT mode, a telephone number can be dialed only using the MCDU keys, not with the switches on the cockpit communication console. In Latched mode, a call to a telephone number loaded into the MCDU can be initiated using the switches on the Audio Control Panel (ACP), and calls can be answered and ended with the switches or the MCDU buttons.(2) Accepting and Making CallsYou can accept and make voice calls using • the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, the MCDU, the ACP, and one or two 4-wire cockpit headsetsor • the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, the WSC, the ACP, and one or two 4-wire cockpit headsets.(a) Automatic Call Handling Priority and PreemptionThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal automatically disconnects (preempts) a call if it receives a higher priority call when both classic Aero channels are in use. When two calls are in progress, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal preempts the lower priority call. If both calls are the same priority, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal preempts the last call received.When the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal preempts the lower priority call and connects the higher priority call, the caller in the aircraft does not receive a notice. The new, high priority call starts as soon as the HSD-440receives it.(b) Accepting and Making CallsYou can use the MCDU and ACP to accept calls, make air-to-ground calls, and make air-to-air calls. You can manually dial calls or dial previously saved telephone numbers from the MCDU’s telephone directory.The way in which you can accept or make calls depends on the mode in which your 4-wire cockpit headset is strapped (PTT mode or Latched mode) and the Cockpit Outgoing Call Pre-Select ORT parameter. Refer to "Configuring Outgoing Call Pre-Selection" on page 6-24.The combination of lights and chimes that alert you to an incoming call depends on the way in which the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Cockpit Call Signalling Mode ORT parameter is set. Refer to C. “Configuring Cockpit Communication Parameters” on page 6-5. If you use the alternate output discretes, the call discrete outputs are driven as per Table 2-4 instead of using lights and chimes.
 Table 2-4  Call Discrete Outputs in HSD-440 Mark 2 TerminalChannel StateAudio Discrete Alternate DiscreteDigital Audio System Light Digital Audio System Chime Discrete 1 Discrete 2On hook Off Off Off OffCall initiated/connected 1 Hz flash Off On OffCall answered Steady or 3 Hz flash Off Off OnIncoming call 1 Hz flash Single-stroke On OnSYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-253 JUN 10To accept the call: • On the first page of the MCDU’s main menu, press the key next to ANSWER CALL. • Assert the Place/End switch. • Assert the VoiceMic On switch.or • In Latched mode, on the ACP, assert the SAT 1 or SAT 2 switch. • In PTT mode, on the ACP, assert the SAT 1 or SAT 2 switch and press the PTT switch.(c) Manual Dialing CallsMaking calls using the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is similar to placing an international telephone call. Air-to-ground telephone numbers include an international access code, country code, and area code.International access codes and country codes are shown in Appendix G: “International Access and Country Codes” on page G-1.To manually dial a call: 1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to DIRECTORY.The SATCOM DIRECTORY page appears.
SATCOMDIRECTORY<CATEGORY0 1 CATEGORY0 3 ><CATEGORY0 2 CATEGORY0 4 >SAT2[ MANUAL D I AL ] PR I3RETURN>SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-263 JUN 10 2. To select a channel, on the SATCOM DIRECTORY page, press the key next to SAT (the channel number). 3. To set the priority for your call using Table 2-5, type the priority number on the MCDU scratchpad and press the key next to PRI (the priority value). Table 2-5  Priority CodesCall priority Description1Emergency—used for distress or urgent calls2Operational-High—used for Flight Safety communications3Operational-Lo—used for Regularity of Flight, Meteorological or Administrative communications4Non-Operational—used for Non Safety of Flight or public phone call (cabin) communications 4. To dial the call, type the phone number into the scratchpad and press the key next to MANUAL DIAL.With Pre-Select Mode disabled, the MCDU Main Menu page appears and the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal initiates the call. With Pre-Select Mode enabled, the MCDU Main Menu page appears. • To start the call with Pre-Select mode enabled, in either Latched or PTT mode, press the key next to MAKE CALL. • To start the call in PTT mode with Pre-Select mode enabled, on the ACP, assert the PLACE/END CALL 1 or PLACE/END CALL 2 switch.  or  assert the SAT 1 or SAT 2 switch and then press the PTT switch. • To start the call In Latched mode with Pre-Select mode enabled, on the ACP, assert the SAT 1 or SAT 2 switch.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-273 JUN 10(d) Making Calls from the Telephone DirectoryYou can make voice calls from the numbers you have saved in the MCDU’s telephone directory.The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MCDU enables you to keep four separate telephone books for different uses. By default, these books are called Category 01, Category 02, Category 03, and Category 04. You can customize the directory names in the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ORT.To make a call from the telephone directory: 1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to DIRECTORY.The SATCOM DIRECTORY page appears.SATCOMDIRECTORY<CATEGORY0 1 CATEGORY0 3 ><CATEGORY0 2 CATEGORY0 4 >SAT2[ MANUAL D I AL ] PR I3RETURN> 2. To access the phone numbers in a directory, press the key next to the directory name.The selected directory appears.CATEGORY 1   1/1MAKE CAL L : SAT10116135551111 PRI* 01 - LABEL 1 30116135552222* 02 - LABEL 2 1[][][]* SORT RETURN>
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-283 JUN 10 3. To dial or load a telephone number, press the key next to the number.With Pre-Select mode disabled, the MCDU main menu page appears and the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal starts the call.With Pre-Select mode enabled, the MCDU main menu page appears.SATCOMMAIN MENU  SAT 1 AVA I LABLE PR I*MAKE CALL 30016135551111  SAT 2 I NCOMI NG CAL L*ANSWER CA L L REJ ECT *PUBL I C  <SUBMENU D I RECTORY> 4. To dial the telephone number with Pre-Select mode enabled: • In PTT or Latched mode, on the MCDU, press the key next to MAKE CALL.or • In PTT mode, on the ACP, assert the PLACE/END CALL 1 or PLACE/END CALL 2 switch or close the SAT 1 or SAT 2 switch, and then press the PTT switch.or • In Latched mode, on the ACP, close the SAT 1 or SAT 2 switch.(e) Ending CallsTo end the call: • In PTT or Latched mode, on the MCDU main menu, press the key next to END CALL.or • In PTT or Latched mode, assert the PLACE/END CALL 1 or PLACE/END CALL 2 switch.or • In Latched mode, on the ACP, assert the VoiceMic On switch for the active call.(f) Saving Telephone Numbers in the Telephone DirectoryYou can save telephone numbers to the MCDU’s telephone directory to use later, and you can dial telephone numbers from the telephone directory.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-293 JUN 10To save telephone numbers to the telephone directory: 1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to DIRECTORY.The SATCOM DIRECTORY page appears. 2. To view telephone numbers stored in a directory, press the key next to the directory name.The directory listing appears. 3. Navigate to the page with the last entry in the directory, type the phone number into the scratchpad, and then press the key next to the empty brackets on the MCDU screen.The telephone number appears in the brackets. 4. Type the name associated with the telephone number and then press the key next to the empty brackets on the MCDU screen. 5. Type the priority associated with the telephone number and then press the key next to the empty brackets on the MCDU screen. 6. To save the number, press the key next to SAVE. To cancel the new entry, press the key next to CANCEL.NOTE: Press the key next to SORT to alphabetically sort the entries in the directory. Entries remain sorted even after the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is rebooted.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 2-303 JUN 10Blank Page
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-13 JUN 10INSTALLATIONThis section provides procedures to install HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals on an aircraft, including the following sections: • Advisories • Pre-Installation Inspection • Mechanical Installation • Electrical Installation • Passive Intermodulation (PIM) Test • Installation and Engineering Diagrams1. AdvisoriesRead the safety advisories in the Introduction section on page INTRO–6 of this manual before you begin installing the terminal.2. Pre-Installation InspectionInspect all parts before you install any HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, to make sure that no damage occurred during shipping.A. Unpacking and Inspecting Equipment • Unpack the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals from the shipping containers. • Verify that the part number displayed on the shipping box and equipment component matches the model and part number ordered. If components are missing from the shipment, contact the supplier or Honeywell Product Support immediately and report the problem. • Visually inspect the terminal for any shipping damage. If any shipping damage has occurred, contact the shipping carrier immediately and report the problem. • Check the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal connectors for corrosion and damage. If damage is noted, do not apply power to the terminal. Contact the supplier or Honeywell Product Support immediately to report the problem.B. Cabling NotesBefore proceeding with the installation of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, read all cabling notes provided on the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Interconnection and Contact Assignment drawings at the end of this section.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-23 JUN 10(1) CablingWhen installing the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, follow the cabling requirements listed below: • Maximum recommended length for Ethernet cables is 50 feet.  • LAN cables must meet flammability, TIA/EIA568-A CAT 5, requirements and conform to ARINC 628 specifications.  • Wire size recommendations: •For +28 V dc HOT (BP2), +28 V dc RTN GND (BP3), 115 V ac COLD (BP7), and Chassis GND (BP8), use 12 AWG •For 115 V ac HOT (BP1), use 20 AWG • Unless otherwise specified, for signaling, use 22 AWG(2) Coaxial Cable Loss ConsiderationsWhen installing HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals, consider the following coaxial cable loss requirements: • Transmit cable: maximum loss is 2.5 dB, including DLNA (typically <0.8 dB), as per ARINC 741. In installations that use a high power relay, the high power relay loss must be included. • Receive cable: minimum loss is 6 dB, maximum loss is 25 dB (including any in-line attenuator), as per ARINC 741.3. Mechanical InstallationThis section contains the information required to plan the physical placement of HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals. The Outline and Installation diagrams, shown in Figure 3-6 and Figure 3-7, illustrate the physical and mechanical specifications of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.In typical aircraft installations, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal assembly fits into standard ARINC, 8-MCU mounting trays.A. Physical PlacementWhen selecting a location for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, allow for adequate spacing for the installation while providing reasonable access for servicing. Leave a minimum gap of 0.5 inches between LRUs. B. Environmental RequirementsThe environmental requirements that must be considered during the physical placement of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals are based on the RTCA/DO-160E Environmental Specifications detailed in "System Description" on page 1-1.The mounting trays offer a number of fan configuration options depending on the physical placement of the LRU in the aircraft. (1) Heating and CoolingRefer to "System Description" on page 1-1 for a complete listing of the RTCA/DO-160E Environmental Specifications for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-33 JUN 10When selecting an installation location for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, consider the heating and cooling requirements listed below: • Power Dissipation (AC/DC models): 275 Watts nominal, 400 Watts maximum • Cooling Air: per ARINC 600 • Recommended Flow rate: 88 kg/hr (185 lbs/hr) • Pressure drop: 5 ±3 mm (0.07 ±0.025 in.) H2O(2) Fan Tray RequirementsWARNING: FAILURE TO INSTALL AND CONFIGURE THE FAN TRAY ASSEMBLY AS INSTRUCTED MAY SERIOUSLY COMPROMISE THE HSD-440 TERMINAL'S EXTREME TEMPERATURE OPERATION.For adequate airflow to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal subassemblies, install plugs in the fan/tray configuration as illustrated in Figure 3-1. Fan tray assemblies may be shipped with or without plugs. If required, order additional plugs from your fan tray manufacturer.Figure 3-1  Fan Tray Plug Configuration (black = installed, white = removed)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-43 JUN 10C. Chassis GroundingThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal tray-mounted assemblies must be electrically bonded to the airframe. Make sure that the mating surfaces are free from contaminants such as paints or other non-conductive elements. Where surface preparations are insufficient to ensure a proper bond, EMS Aviation recommends using a short, tin-coated, copper bonding strap of at least 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) in width. The LRU and tray assemblies should provide a low impedance path of <0.2 ohms.4. Electrical InstallationThis section provides electrical installation details for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals.A. Cabling and Connector RequirementsThis section provides general electrical installation information on power, ground, shielding requirements, and cabling. (1) Power RequirementsThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can operate from the aircraft’s +28 V dc or 115 V ac, 400 Hz (nominal) power supply. If both power sources are connected, the terminal will use the 115 V ac supply.(2) Ground RequirementsImproper grounding can lead to ground loops and induced Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) or Radio Frequency Interference (RFI). When installing an HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, follow standard grounding practices for both chassis and cabling shields. Refer to "Chassis Grounding" on page 3-4 for chassis and tray grounding instructions.(3) Cable Shielding and Termination The preferred method of cable shield termination is in accordance with NEMA WC 27500:2000 and ARINC 741. ARINC Report 413A—Guidance for Aircraft Electrical Power Utilization and Transient Protection provides more detailed information in Attachment 3-2, Wire Shielding and Grounding Requirements and in Appendix 7.Unless otherwise stated, all cable shields must be connected to the closest aircraft ground at both ends of the cable and on both sides of any production break in the cable. Where applicable, terminate shields with connectors via the backshell or via a pigtail with a suitable termination to the closest aircraft ground. General aviation cable-routing guidelines apply. See Table 3-1 for detailed information.NOTE: Typically, Ethernet and ISDN cables have multiple shields; terminate each shield separately.
 Table 3-1  Cable Shielding and Termination Specifications Cable Function Conductor Type (Typical) Single Point Multiple Point Minimum Conductor Coverage By ShieldPower Lines Single conductor, stranded N/A N/A N/ADigital Control Twisted pair, stranded Yes 85%Serial Data Twisted pair, stranded Yes 85%Ethernet Data Twisted pair, stranded Yes 85%ISDN Data Twisted pair, stranded Yes 85%Discrete Lines Single conductor, stranded N/A N/A N/ARF TX and RX Coaxial Yes 95%Single Point: Cable shield terminated at one end only via a connector or suitable crimp terminal.Multiple Point: Cable shield terminated at both ends via a connector or suitable crimp terminal, usually at both ends of the cable and at both sides of any production break.N/A: Not applicable.SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-53 JUN 10To minimize Passive Intermodulation (PIM), the coaxial cable between the DLNA and the antenna must be double-shielded (braid and foil wrap) with gold-plated and soldered (not crimped) connector contacts. Do not use nickel, nickel plating, or stainless steel.B. Installation Wiring NotesThis section includes wiring notes and connection details about strapping.(1) Source/Destination IdentificationSource/Destination Identification (SDI) is provided for the HPA as per ARINC 741 specifications. Pins marked 0 are left open-circuit and pins marked 1 are strapped on the airframe side of the connector to the pin assigned as SDI Common (TP5D). For this HGA application, strap pin TP5B (1) and leave TP5A (0) open.NOTE: The logic for the SDI/WOW is explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. The SDI/WOW logic in this case (where 0=open and 1=strapped to common) is the reverse of the logic applied to all other HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal connectors, FWD ID, system configuration, and data I/O configuration, where 0=strapped to common and 1=open. (2) Maintenance Port InterfaceThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal has an RS-232 maintenance port interface that provides access to the MPU for data loading, system monitoring, and testing purposes. Access to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU is achieved by connecting an RS-232, VT-100 terminal (computer operating a terminal emulation program) to the RS-232 maintenance port.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-63 JUN 10The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal maintenance port is available at the front of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and at the rear ARINC 600 connector. Connection on the front of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is accessible via a DB25S connector for local maintenance of the terminal. Remote access is provided for cases where local access is unavailable. For remote access, install an accessible DB9S connector in the cabin area.NOTE: The front panel and remote connections to the maintenance port cannot operate simultaneously.Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-35 for information on how to connect and use the maintenance port, including equipment requirements, connection and cabling requirements, software loading instructions, and configuration details.(3) Antenna Subsystem RF InterfaceSeveral external RF parameters (such as cable losses and antenna gain) that must be delimited to ensure proper operation dictate the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal performance requirements. Table 3-2 defines the RF parameters and their expected values. Table 3-2  RF Parameters Definitions Parameter Min. Value (dB) Max. Value (dB)Antenna Gain 12 17Antenna to DLNA Loss 0.3DLNA Gain 53 60DLNA Noise Figure 1.8DLNA to HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal (Rx) Loss 625HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to Antenna (Tx) Loss 05 (including DLNA loss)DLNA Insertion Loss (Tx to Antenna Port) –0.8(4) WOW PinsThe WOW1 and WOW2 pins are either left open circuit or connected to the airframe DC ground through a ground proximity switch. The WOW Program Select (PGM) pin is either left open circuit or connected to the Forward Address Common. The two ground states for any pin are open and closed circuit.Resolve any conflict between WOW1 and WOW2 by assuming the aircraft is in-air. The interpretation of the state of the WOW1 and WOW2 pins is defined by the state of the WOW program select pin. Refer to Table 3-3 for details.
 Table 3-3  WOW Pin Wiring Pin Name and LocationWOW1 WOW2 PGM Aircraft StatusTP3G TP3K TP3JCLOSED CLOSED CLOSED In-airOPEN CLOSED CLOSED Not valid—Default in-airCLOSED OPEN CLOSED Not valid—Default in-airOPEN OPEN CLOSED On-groundCLOSED CLOSED OPEN On-groundOPEN CLOSED OPEN Not valid—Default in-airCLOSED OPEN OPEN Not valid—Default in-airOPEN OPEN OPEN In-airSYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-73 JUN 10WOW discretes indicate when an aircraft is on the ground and are used for flight data-logging purposes. Since data that the aircraft is airborne is supplied to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal by other equipment, this information from the discretes is not required. WOW is only used to determine aircraft on-ground status, if the Inertial Reference System (IRS) has no valid data, and the CMC is not installed, or if the CMC is not providing valid data.The function of WOW can inhibit RF transmission when the aircraft is on the ground. This function is disabled by default and must be enabled through the ORT parameter TRANSMIT ON GROUND—see "Configuring Transmit on Ground" on page 6-27.NOTE: If the WOW function is disabled, do not perform normal maintenance when the system is active to avoid RF exposure. Follow normal safety procedures and disable the system before performing antenna maintenance.(5) ICAO IDsTheHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal requires an ICAO ID to operate and access classic services. The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal receives the ICAO ID either from discrete strapping or from an ARINC 429 source as determined by the ICAO CODE SOURCE ORT parameter—see "Configuring the ICAO Code Source" on page 6-15.Figure 3-2 provides an example of a strapped ICAO ID address. This number (for example: Decimal 11256099, Hex ABC123, or Octal 52740443) must be converted into a binary number for strapping.NOTE: MSB is the Most Significant Bit and LSB is the Least Significant Bit.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-83 JUN 10Figure 3-2  ICAO ID, Hex to Binary ConversionA pin strapped to the same potential as TP7K is considered a logical 0, whereas an open circuit pin is considered a logical 1.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-93 JUN 10(6) Remote Status Panel (Optional)An optional remote status panel may be installed when HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals are located in inaccessible or remote locations. The installation of a remote status panel is recommended as it provides visual indications of the power and faults for each terminal. A remote reset switch for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals can also be installed and located with the remote status panel. Figure 3-3 illustrates a typical wiring diagram for the remote reset circuit.(a) Remote Reset Circuit Switch RequirementsHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals support the installation of a Remote Reset Switch circuit as shown in Figure 3-3.The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Remote Reset circuit requires less than 100 ohms between TP1K (RESET) and MP1F(COM) to be asserted and greater than 10 kilohms to be de-asserted (includes all cable and switch contact resistance).Figure 3-3  Remote Reset Circuit Switch(b) Remote LED Driver Circuit RequirementsThe circuit requirements for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Remote Status LED drivers are shown in Figure 3-4. Each LED driver circuit provides an open-drain Field-Effect Transistor (FET) interface that has a maximum continuous drain-to-source voltage of 35 V dc and drain-to-source current of 0.5 A dc. These circuits are designed to sink current to ground only. Any external lamps or LEDs connected to these driver circuits require the appropriate external voltage and series impedance to be connected.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-103 JUN 10Figure 3-4  Remote LED Panel Circuit(7) System Configuration StrappingThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal adjusts its configuration according to the status of several strap pins on the rear ARINC 600 connector.Configuration pins are assigned based on system mode configuration selection and data I/O requirements, as shown in Table 3-4. Detailed pin assignment is shown in Table 3-5. Table 3-4  Configuration Pin Summary Pin Number Name FunctionTP4A to D System Config 1 to 4 System Mode Strap PinsMP5G to K I/O config 1 to 4 Not assigned (set to 1)NOTE: The logic for the System Configuration pins is reverse to the logic explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. • Pins marked 0 are signaled by strapping to Address Common (TP7K). • Pins marked 1 are signaled by an open circuit-no connection. • Configurations resulting in all ones (1) are invalid.(8) System Mode Strap Pins CodingThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal must be externally strapped according to its intended operational configuration mode. Table 3-5 illustrates the system pin strapping for currently supported HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal operational modes and configurations.
 Table 3-5  System Pin StrappingPin StatusSystem Mode TP4A TP4B TP4C TP4DValid - provides Aero H+ services only 0 1 0 0Valid - provides Aero H+ and Swift services 0 1 0 1SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-113 JUN 10All other combinations are invalid and could cause an operating failure.NOTE: The logic for the System Configuration pins is reverse to the logic explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. • Pins marked 0 are signaled by strapping to Address Common (TP7K). • Pins marked 1 are signaled by an open circuit—no connection. • Configurations resulting in all ones (1) are invalid.(9) Call Light Activation StrappingTable 3-6 shows the configuration strapping for call light activation. Table 3-6  Call Light Activation Configuration StrappingPin Number Name FunctionTP4E Call Light Activation Determines whether the call light illuminates on call activation or initialization. Activation occurs when the GES is responding to the call request, and initialization occurs the moment the call is placed. (1=Activation; 0=Initialization)(10)Hookswitch StrappingTable 3-7 shows the configuration strapping for the hookswitch method. Table 3-7  Hookswitch Configuration StrappingPin Number Name FunctionTP2G Hookswitch Method Determines Push To Talk (PTT) or Latched Mode (0=Latched; 1=PTT)(11)Priority 4 Call StrappingTable 3-8 shows the configuration strapping for priority 4 calls.
 Table 3-8  Priority 4 Call Configuration StrappingPin Number Name FunctionTP4F Inhibit Priority 4 Calls Determines whether priority 4 calls are inhibited to and from the cockpit. When these calls are inhibited, incoming calls are not allowed, and outgoing priority 4 calls are rejected. (1=Uninhibited; 0=Inhibited)SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-123 JUN 10(12)Cockpit Voice StrappingThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal announces incoming calls with chimes and lights or the Call Control (CD) discretes, as determined by the Cockpit Call Signaling Mode ORT parameter. If set to Light/Chime, the strapping for this function is shown in Table 3-9. Table 3-9  Chime and Light Strapping for Cockpit VoiceTP4G TP4H Lights ChimeStrapped Strapped SpareStrapped Open Steady Multi-stroke (chime sounds every 0.5 to 1 second)Open Strapped Flashing Single-stroke (chime sounds once)Open Open Steady Single-stroke(13)User InterfacesTo facilitate access to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal interfaces, install the following connectors in the appropriate cabin area.(a) ISDN InterfaceInstall an RJ45 connector in the cabin area for user connections to the ISDN interface.(b) Ethernet Data InterfaceInstall one or two RJ45 interface connectors in the cabin area for user access to the Ethernet interfaces.(c) RJ45 Connector Termination DetailsDetails relating to the RJ45 cable terminations required for both the ISDN and/or 10BASE-T services are shown in Figure 3-5 and Table 3-10.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-133 JUN 10Figure 3-5  RJ45 Connector Terminator Details Table 3-10  RJ45 Wiring Details SIGNALServiceEURO ISDN ETHERNET 10BASE-TPIN CABLE PIN CABLEECS OTHER ECS OTHERRX+ 3White White/green 3White White/orange stripeRX- 6Blue Green 6Green Orange/white stripe or solid orangeTX+ 4White Blue 1White White/green stripeTX- 5Orange White/blue 2Brown Green/white stripe or solid GreenUse LAN cables that meet flammability and TIA/EIA568-A CAT-5 requirements. Cables #922404 (4 conductor) and # 922408 (8 conductor), as supplied by Electronics Cable Specialists, are acceptable. Equivalent substitutions from other manufacturers may be used.(14)System Interfaces(a) ARINC 429 IRS Bus InterfaceNavigational information is provided to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal through the high-speed ARINC 429 IRS bus interface. Refer to "System Description" on page 1-1 for more information. The IRS bus connects through the top plug of the ARINC 600 connector to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal as follows:
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-143 JUN 10 • IRS#1 A   TP4J • IRS#1 B TP4K • IRS#2 A  TP5C* • IRS#2 B  TP5E*You can configure IRS#2 as a secondary IRS bus, or an input bus for the AES ID.(b) Antenna InterfaceThe ARINC 741 antenna subsystem BSU is connected to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal as specified in Table 3-11. Table 3-11  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to BSU Interconnects Signal NameSignal Source Signal DestinationHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Mechanical HGAPhased-Array or Conformal HGAHPA MUTE A  Top/Port BSU-G  TP3ASTBD BSU-G TP3CHPA MUTE B Top/Port BSU-H TP3B STBD BSU-H TP3DBSU BITE A BSU-W(G)* Port BSU-W  TP2ASTBD BSU-W TP2CBSU BITE B BSU-X(H) Port BSU-X  TP2BSTBD BSU-X TP2DMulti-Control A TP3E BSU-T(A)Multi-Control B TP3F BSU-U(B)*Letters in (brackets) represent EMS Aviation AMT-50 BSU pin designationsTop/Port (T/P): Refers to Mechanical (fin-mount) HGA SubsystemPort: Refers to Phased Array (Fuselage-mount) or Port side of Dual (side) Conformal-mount, HGA subsystemStarboard (STBD):  Refers to starboard side of Dual (side) Conformal-mount HGA subsystemNOTE:  If a third MCDU is installed, the HSD-440 cannot use the side mount antennas because the input is allocated to either the third MCDU or the starboard BSU Bite.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-153 JUN 10(c) CMU InterfaceData rates, voltage thresholds, and electrical interface specifications are per ARINC Specification 429. (741 p2-7 p4.7.2). The ARINC 600 wiring interconnections for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and each CMU are shown in Table 3-12. Table 3-12  CMU Strapping Pin Name ToTP1A CMU 1 Input A CMU 1 TP1ATP1B CMU 1 Input B CMU 1 TP1BTP1C CMU 1/2 Output A CMU 1/2 MP2CTP1D CMU 1/2 Output B CMU 1/2 MP2DMP1K CMU 2 Input A CMU 2 TP1AMP2K CMU 2 Input B CMU 2 TP1BYou can set the bus speed either low or high. Both the transmit and receive ports of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ARINC 429 CMU ports operate together at either low speed or high speed. Both CMUs therefore work at either low speed or high speed, but not at different speeds. You can select the speed by setting a flag in the ORT parameter CMU INPUT SPEED SELECT and CMU OUTPUT SPEED SELECT instead of setting a program pin on the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal A600 connector (there are no pins available). If information is not available from the ORT, the bus speed default is low.(d) MCDU InterfaceTable 3-13 shows the strapping for the MCDU. Table 3-13  MCDU StrappingPin NameTP2C MCDU 3 input ATP2D MCDU 3 input BMP3E MCDU 2 input AMP3F MCDU 2 input BMP7G MCDU 1 input AMP7H MCDU 1 input BMP7J MCDU 1/2/3 output AMP7K MCDU 1/2/3 output BC. Connection Details"Connection Details" on page 3-19 provides all top, middle, and bottom plug connection details for all installations.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-163 JUN 105. Passive Intermodulation (PIM) TestThis section describes the passive intermodulation (PIM) test. You must execute the PIM test after installation, if theHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal operates in SwiftBroadband mode.A. OverviewTo meet Inmarsat requirements for SBB operation, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can test for passive intermodulation effects. The PIM test verifies that the transmit signal from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal does not degrade or interfere with the receive signals as a result of PIM.The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can only perform the PIM test when the aircraft is on the ground.When theHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminallogs on to the SBB network, the network assigns the terminal two channels for PIM testing. These channels are not used by other terminals so that theHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminalcan transmit the test frequencies without interfering with other satellite communication equipment or the Inmarsat satellite.NOTE: You can monitor the progress of the PIM test by turning on report 208 in the HSD-440 Mark 2 TerminalMPU. When report 208 is not running, the terminal displays only the results of the test, not the progress.B. PIM RequirementsIn order to successfully perform the PIM test, the aircraft and the satellite communication system must meet the following requirements: • The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal must have successfully logged on to a satellite that is visible at the test location within the last 168 hours (8 days). • The aircraft must not be near any sources of PIM, such as hangars and towers. • The aircraft must be facing due north in the northern hemisphere, and due south in the southern hemisphere.C. PIM TestTo start the PIM test: 1. In theHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU, navigate to Menu 30. MENU 30                           FIRMWARE Vx.x GNDL     list PIMBIT parameters            M     initiate manual PIMBITF     fakeout PIMBIT parameters         P     initiate/stop PIMBIT<CTRL> N  next menu      <CTRL> O  previous menu      =  select reports 2. To start the PIM test, press p.The PIM test starts. The test takes about five minutes.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-173 JUN 10D. PIM Test Results(1) PIM Test Overall StatusAt the end of the PIM test, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal displays the test results. Figure 3-6 shows an example of the test results.
PIMBIT REPORT:  OVERALL STATUS PASSTEST STARTED:   Jan 16 08:15:58 2001    TEST ENDED:   Jan 16 08:20:36 2001ICAO ADDRESS: NOT OBTAINED     ANTENNA SERIAL NUMBER: 456                     TESTED USING MANUALLY ENTERED FREQUENCIES  TRANSMIT CHANNEL 1 = $1CE8 (1630.000 MHz)  TRANSMIT CHANNEL 2 = $4268 (1654.000 MHz)  RECEIVE CHANNEL    = $4B00 (1558.000 MHz)  INTERMOD ORDER     = 7.00  LAST INFORMATION RECEIVED (APPROX) 8:00:00 Tue Jan 16, 2001  PARAMETERS UNCHANGED SINCE         8:00:00 Tue Jan 16, 2001DIRECTION 1:  STATUS PASS  GEOGRAPHIC AZ=-11.00 DEG EL=12.50  VEH-REL AZ=-162.50 EL=12.50  SIGNAL DEGRADATION:  MEAN 0.14 dB  STD DEV 0.03 dB  ?[7m!! POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE !!?[0m    SIGNAL BEFORE TEST: -17.19 dBm  NOISE BEFORE TEST: -32.71 dBm    SIGNAL AFTER TEST: -17.05 dBm  NOISE AFTER TEST: -32.85 dBmDIRECTION 2:  STATUS PASS  GEOGRAPHIC AZ=0.00 DEG EL=18.00  VEH-REL AZ=-151.50 EL=18.00  SIGNAL DEGRADATION:  MEAN 0.07 dB  STD DEV 0.01 dB  ?[7m!! POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE !!?[0m    SIGNAL BEFORE TEST: -16.66 dBm  NOISE BEFORE TEST: -32.92 dBm    SIGNAL AFTER TEST: -17.23 dBm  NOISE AFTER TEST: -33.05 dBmDIRECTION 3:  STATUS PASS  GEOGRAPHIC AZ=11.00 DEG EL=12.50  VEH-REL AZ=-140.50 EL=12.50  SIGNAL DEGRADATION:  MEAN 0.14 dB  STD DEV 0.02 dB  ?[7m!! POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE !!?[0m    SIGNAL BEFORE TEST: -16.01 dBm  NOISE BEFORE TEST: -32.96 dBm    SIGNAL AFTER TEST: -17.21 dBm  NOISE AFTER TEST: -32.94 dBmDIRECTION 4:  STATUS PASS  GEOGRAPHIC AZ=-11.00 DEG EL=18.00  VEH-REL AZ=-162.50 EL=18.00  SIGNAL DEGRADATION:  MEAN 0.13 dB  STD DEV 0.01 dB  ?[7m!! POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE !!?[0m    SIGNAL AFTER TEST: -16.04 dBm  NOISE AFTER TEST: -32.84 dBmDIRECTION 5:  STATUS PASS  GEOGRAPHIC AZ=0.00 DEG EL=12.50  VEH-REL AZ=-151.50 EL=12.50  SIGNAL DEGRADATION:  MEAN 0.12 dB  STD DEV 0.01 dB  ?[7m!! POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE !!?[0m    SIGNAL BEFORE TEST: -17.00 dBm  NOISE BEFORE TEST: -32.73 dBmDIRECTION 6:  STATUS PASS  GEOGRAPHIC AZ=11.00 DEG EL=18.00  VEH-REL AZ=-140.50 EL=18.00  SIGNAL DEGRADATION:  MEAN 0.10 dB  STD DEV 0.01 dB  ?[7m!! POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE !!?[0m    SIGNAL BEFORE TEST: -17.14 dBm  NOISE BEFORE TEST: -33.03 dBm    SIGNAL AFTER TEST: -17.87 dBm  NOISE AFTER TEST: -33.02 dBmPIMBIT COMPLETESYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-183 JUN 10Figure 3-6  Example PIM Test Results
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-193 JUN 10The first line of the PIMBIT report displays the overall PIM status. If the overall status is PASS, the HSD-440 can continue to use SBB services.If the overall status is FAIL: • Check the cable connections of the antenna and the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. • Check the direction in which the test failed and verify that the antenna is not blocked in that direction—see "Directional PIM Test Results" on page 3-19.(2) Directional PIM Test ResultsThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal performs the PIM test with the antenna pointing in different directions and displays the results of the test in each direction. If the overall status of the PIM test is FAIL, you can check the specific directions in which the test failed.For each direction, the PIM test results provide: • Overall Status—pass or fail. • The direction coordinates. • The signal degradation—the maximum value to pass the test is 3 dB. • Possible interference—interference caused by environmental factors, not the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transmit frequencies. Interference indicates that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal received a signal in the receive band even when it wasn’t transmitting, therefore an external signal may be interfering with communication in that direction. • Signal and noise levels before and after the test—the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses this information to check for possible interference.6. Installation and Engineering DiagramsThis section contains the Outline and Installation diagrams, and Interconnection and Contact Assignment drawings for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals.All foldout pages are odd-numbered and not-backed for print production purposes.A. Outline and Installation DiagramsFigure 3-7 and Figure 3-8 illustrate the physical characteristics of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and provides installation data for the terminal.B. Interconnection and Contact Assignment DrawingsFigure 3-9 and Figure 3-10 show the Interconnection details for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals.7. Connection DetailsTable 3-14, Table 3-15, and Table 3-16 show the top, middle, and bottom plug connection details for HSD-440 Stand-Alone terminals.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-203 JUN 10 Table 3-14  HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Top Plug Connection Details I/O From Top Plug Signal Name To DescriptionI1A CMU 1 Input A CMU 1 TP1A CMU 1 RX AI1B CMU 1 Input B CMU 1 TP1B CMU 1 RX BO1C CMU 1/2 Output A CMU 1/2 MP2C CMU 1/2 TX AO1D CMU 1/2 Output B CMU 1/2 MP2D CMU 1/2 TX BI1E ARINC 615 Input AARINC 615 Data LoaderI1F ARINC 615 Input BO1G ARINC 615 Output AO1H ARINC 615 Output BI1J ARINC 615 Link AO1K ARINC 615 Link B (GND)I2A BSU Top/Port BITE AMech. Steered Antenna (MA): BSU, Pin G or W or Other Antenna (OA): BSU, PORT-W and starboard-P ARINC Tx-HI BITE from BSUI2B BSU Top/Port BITE B MA: BSU, Pin H or X, or OA: BSU, PORT-X and STBD-R ARINC Tx-LO BITE from BSUI2C BSU Starboard (STBD) BITE A or MCDU 3 Input AMA: Not required OA: BSU, PORT-P and STBD-WARINC Tx-HI BITE from  BSUI2D BSU STBD BITE Bor MCDU 3 Input BMA: Not required OA: BSU, PORT-R and STBD-XARINC Tx-LO BITE from BSUO2E Spare 1 ARINC 429 Output AO2F Spare 1 ARINC 429 Output B2G Hookswitch methodI2H Spare 2 ARINC 429 Input AI2J Spare 2 ARINC 429 Input BI2K Remote Reset Normally open momentary switch-open side. (Closed side to MP1F) Remote System Reset
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-213 JUN 10I3A Top/Port HPA MUTE A MA: Not required OA: BSU, PORT-G HPA Mute-A, Port BSUI3B Top/Port HPA MUTE B MA: Not required OA: BSU, PORT-H HPA Mute-B, Port BSUI3C STBD HPA MUTE A MA: Not required OA: BSU, STBD G HPA Mute-A, STBD BSUI3D STBD HPA MUTE B MA: Not required OA: BSU, STBD-H HPA Mute-B, STBD BSUO3E Multi-Control A MA: BSU, Pin A or T, or OA: BSU, PORT-T and STBD-TMulti-Control-HI to HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and antenna subsystemO3F Multi-Control B MA: BSU, Pin B or U, or OA: BSU, PORT-U and STBD-UMulti-Control-LO to HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and antenna subsystemI3H Tx DisableI3G WOW 1 TP3G Weight On Wheel, as defined in Note 40 of ARINC 741, Part 1. Refer to "WOW Pins" on page 3-6I3K WOW 2 TP3KI3J WOW Program Select TP3JI4A–4D System Config 1 to 44A and 4C=0 (TP7K common), 4B, 4D=1(open) for standalone mode  and   Wire 4A 4C, 4D =0 (TP7K common), 4B =1 (open) for Aero only operationI4E Call light activationOpen for Call light On at Call Connection Closed for Call Light on at Call InitiationI4F Priority 4 CallsOpen Allow Priority 4 calls to and from CockpitClosed Inhibit Priority 4 calls to and from Cockpit Table 3-14  HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Top Plug Connection Details (Continued)I/O From Top Plug Signal Name To Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-223 JUN 10I4G Chime/light option MSG=0(strapped), 4H=1(open)   Steady lamp, multi-stroke chime4G=1(open), 4H=0(strapped)   Flashing lamp, single stroke chime4G=1(open), 4H=1(open)   Steady lamp, single-stroke chimeI4H Chime/light option LSI4J IRS 1A Aircraft main IRS IRS 429 data, Rx HII4K IRS 1B Aircraft main IRS IRS 429 data, Rx LOI5A SDI 1 Not connected HPA Select Code for HGAI5B SDI 2 SDI common (TP5D) HPA Select Code for HGAI5C Spare 1 ARINC 429 Input AI5D SDI Common 5C IRS #2 Input A5E IRS #2 Input B SDI Common for HPA select codesI5E Spare 1 ARINC 429 Input BI5F–7J ICAO Address,  BITS 24 to 11 = no connection0 = common (TP7K)I7K ICAO Address, CommonCommon GND connection for system and I/O configuration and ICAO ID Table 3-14  HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Top Plug Connection Details (Continued)I/O From Top Plug Signal Name To Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-233 JUN 10 Table 3-15  HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Middle Plug Connection Details I/O From Middle Plug Signal Name To DescriptionO1A Discrete output 1 Remote status panel HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal-Power On (Optional)O1B Discrete output 2 Remote status panel HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal-Fault (Optional)1C Spare1D Switch HI current from chime1E 1D 1E outputs to Audio control panelO1F Discrete Common Remote status panel Discrete Common O1G Maint Port Tx Maint Port serial data, DB9S-2Maintenance computer (laptop/PC), for Remote accessI1H Maint Port Rx Maint Port serial data, DB9S-3I/O 1J Maint Port Signal Ground Maint Port serial data, DB9S-5 I1K CMU 2 Input A CMU 2 TP1A CMU 2 RX AO2A Data I/O Tx No connectionI2B Data I/O Rx No connectionO2C SDU data FutureO2D SDU data FutureI2E SCM data FutureI2F SCM data FutureO2G SCM power +12 V FutureO2H SCM power return 0 V Future2J Data I/O Ground No connectionI2K CMU 2 Input B CMU 2 TP1B CMU 2 RX BO3A Call light 1 Audio Control PanelI3B Mic on 1 Audio Management SystemI3C Chime light inhibit Audio Control Panel
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-243 JUN 10I3D Place/end 1 Audio Management SystemI3E MCDU 2 input A MCDU 2 J4-27 MCDU 2 RX AI3F MCDU 2 input B MCDU 2 J4-28 MCDU 2 RX BO3G Call light 2 Audio Control PanelI3H Mic on 2 Audio Management SystemI3J Go-ahead / Chime reset Audio Control PanelI3K Place/End 2 Audio Management SystemI/O 4A POTS 1 TIP 2-wire Analog Phone TIP (RJ-11, Pin 3) POTS Line 1I/O 4B POTS 1 RING 2-wire Analog Phone RING (RJ-11, Pin 2)I/O 4C POTS 2 TIP 2-wire Analog Phone TIP (RJ-11, Pin 3) POTS Line 2I/O 4D POTS 2 RING 2-wire Analog Phone RING (RJ-11, Pin 2)I4E Input Audio 1 HI cockpit headset 1 cockpit headset 1I4F Input Audio 1 LO cockpit headset 1I/O 4G–4K ReservedI5A CEPT-E1 Rx+ CTU Satcom1 E1 TX+ CTU E1 BusI5B CEPT-E1 Rx- CTU Satcom1 E1 TX- CTU E1 BusO5C CEPT-E1 Tx+ CTU Satcom1 E1 RX+ CTU E1 BusO5D CEPT-E1 Tx- CTU Satcom1 E1 RX- CTU E1 BusO5E Output Audio 1 HI Cockpit Headset 2 Microphone HI Cockpit Headset 1 SpeakerO5F Output Audio 1 LO Cockpit Headset 2 Microphone LOI/O 5G–5K Reserved Table 3-15  HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Middle Plug Connection Details (Continued)I/O From Middle Plug Signal Name To Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-253 JUN 10I6A ISDN 1 Rx+ ISDN, RJ45-3User data, ISDN-1Refer to "User Interfaces" on page 3-12I6B ISDN 1 Rx- ISDN, RJ45-6O6C ISDN 1 Tx+ ISDN, RJ45-4O6D ISDN 1 Tx- ISDN, RJ45-5I6E Input Audio 2 HII6F Input Audio 2 LOO6G 10BASE-T Tx+Cockpit Headset 2 Microphone HICockpit Headset 2 Microphone LOCockpit Voice Microphone 2O6H 10BASE-T Tx- Ethernet 10BASE-T RJ45, Pin 2I6J 10BASE-T Rx+ Ethernet 10BASE-T RJ45, Pin 3I6K 10BASE-T Rx- Ethernet 10BASE-T RJ45, Pin 6O7A 10BASE-T Tx+ Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-1Port 1 User data Ethernet 10BASE-TO7B 10BASE-T Tx- Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-2I7C 10BASE-T Rx+ Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-3I7D 10BASE-T Rx- Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-6O7E Output Audio 2 HI Cockpit Headset 2 Speaker HIO7F Output Audio 2 LO Cockpit Headset 2 Speaker LOI7G MCDU 1 Input AI7H MCDU 1 Input BO7J MCDU 1/2 Output AO7K MCDU 1/2 Output BOC1 RF Tx Output Antenna subsystem-DLNA or HPR-J Coaxial cable, RF Transmit  Table 3-15  HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Middle Plug Connection Details (Continued)I/O From Middle Plug Signal Name To Description
 Table 3-16  HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Bottom Plug Connection Details I/O From Bottom Plug Signal Name To DescriptionIBP2 +28 V dc HOT Aircraft power source, HOT+28 V dc supplyIBP3 +28 V dc return GND Aircraft power source, returnIBP8 Chassis GND Aircraft ground Aircraft Chassis GroundI/O BP4 ReservedI/O BP5 SpareI/O BP6 ReservedIBP1 115 V ac HOT Aircraft power source, HOT 115 V ac 400 Hz supplyIBP7 115 V ac COLD Aircraft power source, COLDI/O BP9–BP11 SpareIBP12 RF Rx Input Antenna subsystem-DLNA Coaxial cable, RF ReceiveOBP13 ReservedSYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-263 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-273 JUN 10Figure 3-7  (Sheet 1). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Outline and Installation Diagram(1252-E-3820-01, Rev A)
Blank PageSYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-283 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-293 JUN 10Figure 3-8  (Sheet 2). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Outline and Installation Diagram(1252-E-3820-01, Rev A)
Blank PageSYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-303 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-313 JUN 10Figure 3-9  (Sheet 1). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal System Interconnection Diagram (1252-B-3820, Rev B)
Blank PageSYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-323 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-333 JUN 10Figure 3-10  (Sheet 2). HSD-440 Mark 2 TerminalSystem Interconnection Diagram (1252-B-3820, Rev B)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 3-343 JUN 10Blank Page
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-353 JUN 10TEST AND FAULT ISOLATIONThis chapter provides information required to determine the operational readiness of HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals and aid service personnel in diagnosing system faults. The operational and diagnostic tests described in this section require using the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal’s built-in diagnostic tool, the MPU.This chapter includes: • Operational and Diagnostic Testing • Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation • Adjustment/Alignment Procedures • Modification History NOTE: Depending on the version of software installed, the MPU report and menu screens displayed may differ from those shown as examples in this manual. The menu screens in this section correspond to the HSD-440 Stand-Alone terminal in maintenance user mode.1. Operational and Diagnostic TestingThis section includes the following sections: • General • Test and Fault Isolation Equipment Requirements • Terminal Maintenance Port Utility • Inmarsat Cause Codes • Operational and Diagnostic Test ProceduresA. GeneralUsually, terminals require testing for one of the following reasons: • To verify the operational readiness of the terminal during and after installation on an aircraft • To verify that a fault exists and produce system reports for troubleshooting purposes • To verify the operational readiness of repaired LRUs during re-installation on an aircraftThis section includes test and fault isolation procedures for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals. All test and load procedures require the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU, which is accessed by connecting to the maintenance port of the terminal. B. Test and Fault Isolation Equipment RequirementsTable 4-1 lists the equipment required to access the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU and perform operational and diagnostic testing and software loading on the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
 Table 4-1  List of Required Test Equipment Item Equipment Specification QuantityComputer  Standard  VT-100 386 CPU, 20 MHz or higher 1VT-100 terminal emulation program HyperTerminal©, ProComm Plus©, or equivalentSerial communication program using an RS-232 port 1Cable, maintenance port interface cable  SpecialSee "Connection Requirements" on page 4-37Remote access maximum cable length 25 ft. (From ARINC 600 connector to DB9 breakout connector) Test cable maximum length 25 ft.  (From HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to management computer) Front Panel access maximum cable length 50 ft. 1Multimeter Standard – 1General purpose toolset Standard – 1SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-363 JUN 10Table 4-2 lists the optional equipment or information that is not required, but may increase test efficiency or allow for optional diagnostic procedures. Equivalent substitutions may be used. Table 4-2  List of Optional Test Equipment Item Equipment Specification QuantityService Provider Information Package Special Inmarsat service provider 1Internet access Standard Inmarsat Swift 64 high-speed data 1Time Domain Refectometer Standard  – 1C. Terminal Maintenance Port UtilityThis section describes the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU and provides the connection and cabling details required to access and use the program.(1) General OverviewThe MPU, built into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal's operational software, provides a system interface for fault isolation and diagnostic procedures.To use the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU, connect an RS-232, VT-100 terminal (computer operating a terminal emulation program) to the RS-232 maintenance port interface of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. The maintenance port on the front panel of HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals provides a direct connection to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU using a DB25 connector. Optionally, remote cabin access is possible using a DB9 connector via the ARINC 600 connector.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-373 JUN 10(2) Connection RequirementsThis section describes specific cabling requirements needed to connect to and use the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU.(a) Cabling NotesThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals provide two options to connect to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal maintenance port and MPU: direct connection and remote connection.Table 4-3, Table 4-4, Figure 4-1, and Figure 4-2 provide cabling details for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal for both direct and remote connection types. Select one of these connection options to access the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU.NOTE: The direct and remote connection points to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal maintenance port cannot be used simultaneously. Table 4-3  Remote Connection Cabling Remote AccessPin Definition ARINC Connector (Rear) Remote (DB9)Cable(See Figure 4-1)Computer (DB9P)Maint Port SGND (MP1J) 5 5Maint Port Rx (MP1H) 3 3Maint Port Tx (MP1G) 2 2 Table 4-4  Direct Connection Cabling Direct ConnectionPin Definition Front Panel Maintenance Cable Connector (DB25P) Cable (See Figure 4-2)Computer (DB9P)Maint Port SGND 10 10 5Maint Port Rx 12 12 3Maint Port Tx 11 11 2(b) Maintenance Port Cable Assembly HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal maintenance cable connections may vary in length, type of connection used, and connector pin call outs, depending on the access point used.The cable assembly for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal assumes that the computer's COM port interface is a 9-Pin, D-Sub connector (DB9). Cable assembly details for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals are presented in Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2.NOTE: The maximum cable length, shown in Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2, assumes that the length is measured from the ARINC 600 connector to the DB9 breakout connector.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-383 JUN 10Figure 4-1  Remote Connection, Maintenance CableFigure 4-2  Direct Connection, Maintenance Cable(c) Interface RequirementsA standard VT-100 compatible terminal running an emulator program (such as HyperTerminal, ProComm Plus, or similar) provides the user interface to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU. The RS-232 terminal connection settings for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal maintenance ports are listed in Table 4-5.
 Table 4-5  Terminal Connection Settings Parameter SettingCharacter Format ASCIIBaud Rate 19200 bpsNo. of bits 8Parity NoneStop bits 1Flow Control NoneSYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-393 JUN 10(3) Accessing the MPUThere are various levels of access to the MPU. Each level is protected by a different password.This document describes End User and Field Representative access levels. These levels provide access and tools for operational testing and verification, software updates, and the basic system monitoring and troubleshooting procedures provided in this manual. (a) Level 1 AccessThis limited-access level is for anyone without technical training on the product. It provides read-only access to help users diagnose problems with the assistance of product support personnel.The password for access to this level is menu.(b) Level 2 AccessThis level is for trained original equipment manufacturer (OEM) installers and product support personnel. This access level supports read and limited write capabilities. Users can disable, mask, or clear faults, change satellite or LES/GES preferences, view and modify certain EEPROM parameters, and maintain and upgrade the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.The password for this level is maint.(4) Using the Terminal MPUThis section describes the basic procedures for using and navigating the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU.(a) Entering PasswordsYou can enter the password any time after the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal boots. • To access Level 1 functions, type menu. • To access Level 2 functions, type maint.NOTE: The password does not appear on the screen when you type it.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-403 JUN 10(b) Navigating the Terminal MPU • To scroll through the available menus, press CTRL+N. • To go to the previous menu, press CTRL+O. • To refresh the menu screen or exit from a Reports Menu, press ESC.(c) Selecting Menu ItemsTo enable test or data entry functions, press the letter associated with the menu items.(d) Selecting ReportsThe reports available through the MPU enable users to view information about the configuration and status of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. This information is used to troubleshoot the communication system on the aircraft."Report Descriptions" on page 4-53 provides more information about reports.To access reports: 1. In the MPU, press EQUAL SIGN.A list of reports appears. Active reports show as toggled on. Inactive reports show as toggled off.  2. To activate a report, type the report number, and then press ENTER.NOTE: Multiple reports can be activated at the same time; type and enter each report number separately. 3. To turn off individual, active reports, type the report number you want to toggle off, and then press ENTER. 4. To turn off all active reports, press EQUAL SIGN, and then press X. (5) Menu Item DescriptionsThis section provides a brief description of the Level 2, MPU menu items used for test and fault isolation procedures. Although this section only provides illustrations and descriptions for Level 2 access, all Level 1 access menu items are covered. (All Level 1 menus are included in Level 2 Menus.)In active HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals, menu screens display the firmware version.NOTE: Depending on the version of software installed and the system configuration, the menu and reports available to users may differ slightly from the illustrations shown and described in this document.(a) Menu 1Figure  shows an example Menu 1 screen display. Table 4-6 describes the items available in Menu 1.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-413 JUN 10Menu 1 Screen Display Table 4-6  Menu 1 Item Descriptions Menu Item DescriptionX: override forward id/ICAO address Used in testing and fault isolation.Enter a test or alternate FWD ID or ICAO ID to use during fault isolation procedures. Resetting the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal or cycling the power cancels this function.Y: explain error status Reports error status when failure LED is illuminated.F: print equipment stats Prints a list of the current equipment statistics.N: permit TFTP software loads Upgrade or load HSD software using the EMS serial data loader connected to the HSD terminal maintenance port and using TFTP over the front panel Ethernet port.Note: When this option is enabled, software loads start within the next 10 minutes. To enable this option, the aircraft air/ground status must be on-ground.L: test LEDs Toggles the Power On (LED 1) and Fault (LED 2) LEDs on (A) and off (D) or returns them to software control (X). U: list event log Lists the current event log.M: clear equipment stats Resets the equipment statistics. (See Item F.)         MENU 1                              FIRMWARE Vx.x GND X     override forward id/ICAO address  L     test LEDsY     explain error status              U     list event log (hex)F     print equipment stats             M     clear equipment statsN     permit TFTP software loads<CTRL> N  next menu      <CTRL> O  previous menu      =  select reports(b) Menu 2 Figure 4-3 shows an example MPU Menu 2 screen display. Table 4-7 describes the items available in Menu 2.
       MENU 2                            FIRMWARE Vx.x GNDA     set veh-relative azimuth          E     set veh-relative elevationK     desired az veh-rel velocity       R     resume automatic steeringT     enter time of day                 N     annotate log fileL     re-enter logon password           V     get firmware versionsZ     reset 1252-A-3800-01              S     set satellite longitudeG     manual antenna steering<CTRL> N  next menu      <CTRL> O  previous menu      =  select reportsSYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-423 JUN 10Figure 4-3  Menu 2 Screen Display Table 4-7  Menu 2 Item Descriptions Menu Item DescriptionNOTE: Menu 2 selections A and E are used to manually input navigational data to point the antenna to a preferred satellite location and/or peak for maximum signal reception. These commands are typically used where no IRS data is available. A: set veh-relative azimuth Antenna azimuth pointing offset with reference to the front centerline of the aircraft.Offset value entered in degrees from 0 to 180, where a positive entry is clockwise (cw) and a negative entry is counterclockwise (ccw).K: desired az veh-rel velocity Activates continuous antenna azimuth sweep at a set elevation, as entered with menu item E.Azimuth sweep velocity entered as deg/sec value.NOTE: When combined with a signal-monitoring reports selection, sweep the antenna for maximum signal strength to determine optimum location coordinates.T: enter time of day Permits the entry of date and time for initial one-time setting of the Real Time Clock.L: re-enter logon passwordPermits a user to enter a new access level password: menu or maint.Z: reset terminal Enables a complete, soft reset of the LRU; once reset, the menu access password must be re-entered.G: manual antenna steering Set manual antenna-steering in both azimuth and elevation.Four options: • I increases elevation 0.5 deg • M decreases elevation 0.5 deg • L increases azimuth 0.5 deg • J decreases azimuth 0.5 degE: set veh-relative elevation Antenna elevation pointing offset with respect to the aircraft horizontal rest position; i.e., assumed to have no pitch or roll offset.Offset value entered in degrees from 0 to 90.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-433 JUN 10(c) Menu 3Table 4-7Figure 4-4 shows the menu 3 screen display. Table 4-8 describes the items available in Menu 3.      MENU 3                                         FIRMWARE Vx.xL     list EEPROM                       S     list event logC     clear event log                   M     misc.  EEPROM parameterF     list call log                     G     clear call logO     list ORT                          P     ocean region parameterI     set all LES id's                  H     list SCM/CP ORTK     set CP ORT parameter              R     copy CP ORT to SCMT     write defaults to CP ORT          U     clear SCM ORTD     output binary ORT                 V     bulletin board satellite dataB     list channel card event log<CTRL> N  next menu      <CTRL> O  previous menu      =  select reportsFigure 4-4  Menu 3 Screen DisplayR: resume automatic steering Re-activates programmed automatic antenna-steering in both azimuth and elevation.N: annotate log file Allows for input of text into a log file.This feature can be used to document information such as test conditions, system or aircraft identification, or any pertinent information for later review.V: get firmware versions Displays the system Kernel and Application software versions, and the channel card(s) and HPA firmware revisions.S: set satellite longitude Sets the satellite longitude. Table 4-7  Menu 2 Item Descriptions (Continued)Menu Item Description Table 4-8  Menu 3 Item Descriptions Menu Item DescriptionL: list EEPROM Displays a list of all system EEPROM parameters and their corresponding values (this function is READ only).Certain parameters are set using Menu 3, item M selection.C: clear event log Clears all events stored in non-volatile RAM.F: list call log Displays call log files for  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. When selected, three options are available: • To display complete list of all log files, press F. • To list extended EIRP trace data, press X. • To list all remaining entries, press PERIOD.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-443 JUN 10For more information about ORT parameters, see "Configuring the Owners Requirements Table (ORT)" on page 6-1.Figure 4-5  shows an example Menu 3, Item M: Miscellaneous EEPROM parametersscreen display for the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.Table 4-9 describes the items available in Menu 3, Item M.O: list ORT Displays all EEPROM parameters, including all cable losses and LES/GES configurations.I: set all LES id's Displays all ORT parameters to the same LES/GES access code and service provider (including primary and secondary service providers).Certain parameters are set using Menu 3, set CP ORT parameter.K: set CP ORT parameter Use the ORT parameters to configure parameters for the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.T: write defaults to CP ORT Each SDU stores a copy of the User, Secure, and Manufacturer Specific ORT parameter defaults in its software load.V: bulletin board satellite data The  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal stores the updated satellite longitude from the bulletin board.S: list event log Lists all events and system fault codes stored in non-volatile RAM.When selected, several options are available: • 0 displays the most recent saved entry. • S displays next most recent entry saved. • PERIOD displays all remaining logged entries. • 1 displays special events (does not include ORR entries).M: misc. EEPROM parameter Enables entry or entry changes to some of the EEPROM parameters listed in function L.G: clear call log Clears call log files for  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.P: ocean region parameter Configures LES access codes (primary and secondary service providers) for individual ORs.H: list SCM/CP ORT Lists the values contained in both SCM and the CP ORT.R: copy CP ORT to SCM Copies values stored in the CP ORT to the SCM. This may take several minutes. To indicate progress, the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal displays the number of bytes remaining to transfer.U: clear SCM ORT Clear the ORT parameter from the SCM. B: list channel card event log Lists the event log for individual channel cards. Table 4-8  Menu 3 Item Descriptions (Continued)Menu Item Description
MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 1  HPA-TO-ANTENNA TOTAL LOSS           21  CARD 2 IP ADDRESS 2  FORWARD ID                          22  TRANSMIT IF WEIGHT-ON-WHEELS 3  GPS PROTECTION ALGORITHMS           29  DEFAULT LATTITUDE  11  FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED            30  DEFAULT LONGITUDE14  MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO      31  OBEY OXCO STATUS15  MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL     63  CARD 1 SUBNET MASK16  TERMINAL CATEGORY                   64  CARD 2 SUBNET MASK20  CARD 1 IP ADDRESS                   65  AIR/GROUND BEHAVIOURWHICH PARAMETER # <CTRL> N for next page ?73  CP AUTO ATTACH                      90  BGAN/SWIFT64 CONGESTION THRESHOLD74  CC SBB CIPER PARAMETER              91  BGAN/SWIFT64 AUTO HANDOVER83  IP HEADER COMPRESSION               95  OVER-POWER MARGIN84  SW64 POSITION REPORTING             97  CHANNEL CARD CONFIGURATION85  APAC TEST BEARER LONGITUDE          100 MIN SAT LOOK ANGLE86  EMEA TEST BEARER LONGITUDE          101 PREEMPTABLE CALLS87  AMERICAS TEST BEARER LONGITUDE      102 BGAN/SWIFT64 HYSTERESIS TIMEOUT89  BGAN/SWIFT64 CONGESTION TIMEOUT     103 ANTENNA MOUNTING ANGLE (ROLL)WHICH PARAMETER # <CTRL> N for next page ?104  ANTENNA MOUNTING ANGLE (PITCH)     114 MAX ORDER FOR INTERMOD CHECK105  ANTENNA MOUNTING ANGLE (ROTATION)  115 ENABLE PAP106  RT-CHANNEL RESERVED POWER          116 PAP USER NAME108  USWR ERROR THRESHOLD               117 PAP PASSWORD109  IRS1 TYPE                          118 VOICE PROCESSOR IP ADDRESS110  IRS2 TYPE                          119 LNA TO SDU RX THRESHOLD113  MAXIMUM IGA POWER SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-453 JUN 10Figure 4-5  Menu 3 - Item M: Miscellaneous EEPROM Parameters Table 4-9  Menu 3, Item M EEPROM Parameter Descriptions Parameter Number Parameter Name Description1HPA-to-antenna total loss Defines transmit coaxial cable loss from the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal at MPC1 to the antenna, including the DLNA loss—maximum is 2.5 dB (includes DLNA loss of 0.8 dB).2Forward ID The Forward ID is not strapped, therefore you must enter it using this parameter.3GPS protection algorithms Disables the GPS algorithms the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses to prevent calls from interfering with the GPS navigational system on the aircraft.10 Number of channel cards Selects the number of channel cards for which the system is configured. Default is 2.11 Front panel LEDs enabled Future consideration is provided for additional LEDs, beyond the two currently activated—default is 2.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-463 JUN 1014 Maintenance port inverse video Enables a selected report to be highlighted in Inverse Video when it is activated—default is 1 (activated).15 Maintenance port degrees symbol Offers a choice of displaying the letter D or the degree symbol ° when viewing the lat/long information displayed in the Reports output: • Select 0 to use the letter D; e.g., 180.0 D. • Select 1 to use a degree symbol °; e.g., 180.0°.16 Terminal category Configure the LRU type. Default is 2 (HW Strapping) —hardware is read on power-up.20 Card 1 IP address IP address of channel card 1.21 Card 2 IP address IP address of channel card 2.22 Transmit if Weight-on-Wheels Allows the system to transmit when it is on the ground. 29 Default latitude Allows user to enter a default latitude value.Reset the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to activate revised default values.30 Default longitude Allows user to enter a default longitude value. Reset the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to activate revised default values.31 Obey OXCO status Prevents system operation until OCXO is warmed up (unless overridden).Use parameter setting to override warm-up during testing procedures.60 Ch card gateway address Manufacturer-specific - do not modify. 61 IMEI number Manufacturer-specific - do not modify. 62 SDU-to-PA gain Manufacturer-specific - do not modify. 63 Card 1 subnet address Subnet address of channel card 1.64 Card 2 subnet address Subnet address of channel card 2.65 Air/ground behavior Determines the function of WOW strapping.66 #2 IMEI number Manufacturer-specific - do not modify. 67 #3 IMEI number Manufacturer-specific - do not modify. 68 #4 IMEI number Manufacturer-specific - do not modify.73 CP auto attach To ensure that the terminal registers on the SwiftBroadband Circuit-Switched and Packet-Switched core network, set this option to CS PS. Network Registration is essential to access network resources to make calls.74 CC SBB cipher parameter Ciphers the messages between the terminal and the core network. Table 4-9  Menu 3, Item M EEPROM Parameter Descriptions (Continued)Parameter Number Parameter Name Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-473 JUN 10(d) Menu 4 Figure 4-6 shows an example MPU Menu 4 screen display for an  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. Table 4-10 describes the items available in Menu 4. 83 IP Header Compression Turns on IP header compression. Valid values: C (channel card default = Off), 0 (Off), and 4 through 9 (On)95 Over Power Margin Do not change.297 Channel Card Configuration Configures channel cards for Swift64, SBB, or classic service.2101 Preemptable Calls Configures which calls can be preempted when performing a satellite handover.102 BGAN/SWIFT64 Hysteresis Timeout Configures the time it will take to perform a satellite handover once a new satellite is visible.2Default is 120.0 SEC.103 Antenna Mounting Angle (Roll) Configures the physical antenna mounting angle (Roll).2104 Antenna Mounting Angle (Pitch) Configures the physical antenna mounting angle (Pitch).2105 Antenna Mounting Angle (Rotation)Configures the physical antenna mounting angle (Rotation).2106 RT Channel Reserved Power Do not change.2108 VSWR Error Threshold Do not change.2109 IRS1 Type Configures the navigation data type for the ARINC 429 IRS receiver 1.2110 IRS2 Type Configures the navigation data type for the ARINC 429 IRS receiver 2.2113 Maximum IGA Power Do not change.2115 Enable PAP Enables PAP authentication. For configuration instructions, refer to the HSD Terminal Developer’s Guide, MN-1252-13005.2116 PAP User Name Configures PAP authentication username. Refer to the HSD Terminal Developer’s Guide, MN-1252-13005.2117 PAP Password Configures PAP authentication password. Refer to the HSD Terminal Developer’s Guide, MN-1252-13005.2118 Voice Processor IP AddressDo not change.2119 LNA to SDU RX ThresholdDo not change.2 Table 4-9  Menu 3, Item M EEPROM Parameter Descriptions (Continued)Parameter Number Parameter Name Description
      MENU 4                            1252-A-3800-01 FIRMWARE Vx.xQ     channel card forward ID's         O     set Ocean RegionS     change spot beam                  J     toggle ISDN connectionM     report MUX stats<CTRL> N  next menu      <CTRL> O  previous menu      =  select reportsSYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-483 JUN 10Figure 4-6  Menu 4 Screen Display Table 4-10  Menu 4 Item Descriptions Menu Item Item DescriptionQ: channel card forward IDs Enables viewing of ISDN channels 1 and 2 FWD IDs in Swift64 mode, IMSI in SBB mode, and ICAO for the classic channel card.S: change spot beam Enables manual selection of specific spot beams independently assigned for each ISDN channel.M: report MUX stats Not applicable: Used for engineering debugging purposes only.O: set Ocean Region Allows for manual selection of satellite ORs: AORW: 0AORE: 1POR: 2IOR: 3MTSAT: 4APAC: 5EMEA: 6AMERICAS: 7 To revert to programmed selection, type -1, and then press ENTER for AUTO selection.(e) Menu 10 Menu 10 items are used to manually enter INS or IRS parameters to simulate the data required for  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal operation when INS or IRS data is unavailable. Figure 4-7 shows an example HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU Menu 10 screen.
        MENU 10                         1252-A-3800-01 FIRMWARE Vx.xA     activate IRS simul words          X     deactivate IRS simul wordsF     IRS bus #1                        L     simul IRS lat G     simul IRS long                    H     simul IRS headingT     simul IRS true track              P     simul IRS pitchR     simul IRS roll                    S     simul IRS speedQ     simul IRS altitude                C     port ACU statusB     sb ACU status                     M     activate antenna status wordsN     deactivate antenna status words   D     toggle active antenna<CTRL> N  next menu      <CTRL> O  previous menu      =  select reportsSYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-493 JUN 10Figure 4-7  Menu 10 Screen DisplayTable 4-11 describes the items available in Menu 10. Table 4-11  Menu 10 Item Descriptions Menu Item DescriptionL: simul INS lat Simulates a latitude by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS.H: simul INS heading Simulates aircraft heading by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS.P: simul INS pitch Simulates aircraft pitch by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS.S: simul INS speed Simulates aircraft speed by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS.A: activate INS simul words Activates all input simulate parameters, overriding the INS data received from the aircraft.Lat and Long values from the EEPROM values set in Menu 3.B: simul sb ACU status Enter the starboard antenna gain in dB and the message rate in Hz.N: deactivate antenna status    wordsDe-activates all set antenna status words.X: deactivate INS simul words De-activates all simulated parameters reverting the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal back to using the INS data received from the aircraft.G: simul INS/IRS long Simulates aircraft longitude by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS.T: simul INS/IRS true trackSimulates true track by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS.R: simul INS roll Simulates aircraft roll by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS.Q: simul INS altitude Simulates aircraft altitude by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS.C: simul port ACU status Enter both the port antenna gain in dB and the message rate in Hz.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-503 JUN 10(f) Menu 13 Menu 13 items are used to query and debug the data I/O card. Figure 4-8 shows an example Menu 13 screen display. Table 4-12 describes the items available in Menu 13.      MENU 13                           1252-A-3800-01 FIRMWARE Vx.xT     query DATA IO elapsed time        V    query DATA IO versionS     query DATA IO services            D    DATA IO test F     DATA IO fault logging level       X    DATA IO console modeG     print DATA IO call database       Y    disable output to DATA I/O<CTRL> N  next menu      <CTRL> O  previous menu      =  select reportsFigure 4-8  Menu 13 Screen Display Table 4-12  Menu 13 Item Descriptions Menu Item DescriptionT: query DATA IO elapsed time Displays the time (in seconds) since the last data I/O reset.S: query DATA IO services Displays active interfaces.F: DATA IO fault logging level Sets the level of minimum severity of events that are reported to the data I/O card.G: print DATA IO call database Displays the calls made and recorded in the data I/O database.V: query DATA IO version Displays the firmware version of the data I/O card.D: DATA IO test Tests individual interfaces of the data I/O.X: DATA IO console mode Opens a virtual TTY session to the data I/O maintenance port on the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.Y: disable output to DATA I/ODisables output to data I/O from control processor.M: activate antenna status words Activates all set antenna status words.D: toggle active antenna Changes the current simulated active antenna. Choose starboard, port, or automatic. Note that this change will only take effect if antenna status words are activated using menu item M.F: IRS bus #1 Do not change Table 4-11  Menu 10 Item Descriptions (Continued)Menu Item Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-513 JUN 10(g) Menu 14 Menu 14 items are used only by professional installers for debugging and clarifying call routing issues.Figure 4-9 shows an example  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU Menu 14 screen display. Table 4-13 describes some of the items available in Menu 14.      MENU 14                         1252-A-3800-01 FIRMWARE Vx.xN     num entries in call table      L     list call table               T     get call table                     E     list eeprom call mapping editsG     modify eeprom call mapping edits<CTRL> N  next menu      <CTRL> O  previous menu      =  select reportsFigure 4-9  Menu 14 Screen Display(h) Menu 15 Figure 4-10 shows an example  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU Menu 15 screen display. Table 4-14 describes the items available in Menu 15.       MENU 15                           1252-A-3800-01 FIRMWARE Vx.xV     request channel card versions     D     channel card serial numberB     channel card RSSI mode            G     A_TI queryW     request burst counter<CTRL> N  next menu      <CTRL> O  previous menu      =  select reportsFigure 4-10  Menu 15 Screen Display Table 4-13  Menu 14 Item DescriptionsMenu Item Item DescriptionG: modify eeprom call mapping edits Do not change.E: list eeprom call mapping edits Do not change.
 Table 4-14  Menu 15 Item Descriptions Menu Item Item DescriptionV: request channel card versions Displays software versions for a selected channel card.B: channel card RSSI modePlaces the channel card in Received Signal Strength Indicator mode.As requested, enter the channel number, the OR, the channel type, and the RSSI period in milliseconds.W: request burst counter Displays the burst counter information.D: channel card serial number Displays the serial number of the selected channel card.G: A_TI query Manually sends an A_TI query to the requested channel card to check on the alive/dead status of the channel card processors.As requested, enter a channel card number and service type to query.SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-523 JUN 10(i) Menu 21 Figure 4-11  shows an example Menu 21 screen display.Table 4-15 describes some of the items available in Menu 21.        MENU 21                         1252-A-3800-01 FIRMWARE Vx.xP    get channel card ethernet parms   I    get channel card IMEI numberB    request SBB configuration         L    list spotbeam tableG    logoff SBB spotbeam               N    GPS-assisted IRS dataQ    query channel card flashprom      Y    activate ZB burst statusJ    inquire for spot beam map<CTRL> N  next menu      <CTRL> O  previous menu      =  select reportsFigure 4-11  Menu 21 Screen Display Table 4-15  Menu 21 Item Descriptions Menu Item Item DescriptionP: get channel card ethernet parms Displays the Ethernet parameters of the channel card, including the MAC address, the IP address, the gateway IP address, the host name, the DHCP status, and the DHCP server IP address.B: request SBB configuration Displays the SwiftBroadband configuration.I: get channel card IMEI key Displays the IMEI key of the channel card.N: GPS-assisted IRS data Displays the GPS-assisted precision configuration for SBB.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-533 JUN 10(j) Menu 30Figure 4-12 shows an example  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU Menu 30 screen display. Table 4-16 describes some of the items available in Menu 30.NOTE: For more information about PIM testing, refer to "Passive Intermodulation (PIM) Test" on page 3-16. MENU 30                            FIRMWARE Vx.x GNDL     list PIMBIT parameters            M     initiate manual PIMBITF     fakeout PIMBIT parameters         P     initiate/stop PIMBIT<CTRL> N  next menu      <CTRL> O  previous menu      =  select reportsFigure 4-12  Menu 30 Screen Display(6) Report DescriptionsWhen testing or troubleshooting the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, monitoring real-time system data is sometimes required. Figure 4-13 shows all the reports potentially available to a Level 2 user.Most reports are used for factory debugging purposes only. This document describes only the reports typically used in the field for operational and fault isolation testing.NOTE: Depending on the version of software installed, the MPU reports that appear may differ from those shown as an example in Figure 4-13. Table 4-16  Menu 30 Item Descriptions  Menu Item Item DescriptionL: list PIMBIT parameters List the parameters used during PIM testing including transmit and receive channel frequencies.M: initiate manual PIMBIT Start the manual PIM test. Do not use.N: initiate/stop PIMBIT Start the automatic PIM test.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-543 JUN 101 OFF OFF messages to card #1          13 OFF messages to card #2 2 OFF OFF hex output to card #1        14 OFF hex output to card #2 3 OFF OFF responses from card #1       15 OFF responses from card #2 4 OFF OFF hex input from card #1       16 OFF hex input from card #2 5 OFF OFF card #1 misc info            17 OFF card #2 misc info 6 OFF sb antenna arinc input           18 OFF port antenna arinc input 7 OFF sb antenna maintenance word      19 OFF port antenna maintenance word 8 OFF sb antenna status word           20 OFF port antenna status word 9 OFF channel card call status         21 OFF call codes10 OFF channel card THA codes           22 OFF spot beam selection11 OFF channel card errors              23 OFF standard output12 OFF IRS input                        24 OFF doppler, antenna az/elEnter 1 thru 203 to toggle report on/offX  turn off all reports    <CTRL> N  show next page    S   save to EEPROMESC  return to PREVIOUS MENU25 OFF HPA arinc i/o                    39 OFF combined-mode debugging27 OFF HPA/channel card backoffs        40 OFF enthusiastic combined-mode debug28 OFF miscellaneous digital inputs     41 OFF delta combined-mode debugging29 OFF channel card A_AM msgs           43 OFF sdu path cable calibration30 OFF multi-control arinc bus          44 OFF hpa calibration (gain droop)31 OFF ocean region info                45 OFF combined mode ocean region debug32 OFF hex input from data i/o          46 OFF hpa resets33 OFF hex output to data i/o           47 OFF channel card temperature34 OFF input from data i/o              48 OFF hexadecimal IRS input35 OFF changes in multi-control bus     49 OFF main loop latency36 OFF unit test call setup             50 OFF main loop timing38 OFF combined-mode power allotment    51 OFF one second tickEnter 1 thru 203 to toggle report on/offX  turn off all reports    <CTRL> N  show next page    S   save to EEPROMESC  return to PREVIOUS MENU52 OFF extended call codes              76 OFF HSD-X arinc messages54 OFF multi-control time and date      77 OFF HSD-X net configuration60 OFF OFF debug channel card power     78 OFF vt100 eirp/power61 OFF non-zero channel card power      79 OFF dialtone debugging62 OFF m4 availability status           86 OFF Channel card rx attenuation64 OFF channel card frequencies         87 OFF interworking report65 OFF enthusiastic messages from HPA   89 OFF debug call teardown66 OFF channel card boot sequence       91 OFF HSD frequencies67 OFF debug honeywell combined mode    92 OFF intermod debugging68 OFF CFDS debugging                   93 OFF spot beam debugging69 OFF vt100 scenario                   94 OFF vt100 channel card info72 OFF DATA I/O events                  95 OFF vt100 debuggingEnter 1 thru 203 to toggle report on/offX  turn off all reports    <CTRL> N  show next page    S   save to EEPROMESC  return to PREVIOUS MENU
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-553 JUN 10 96 OFF IRS data rate                    118 OFF channel card rf loopback107 OFF unusual channel card msgs       119 OFF I2C controller i/o108 OFF channel card rf pwr detect      120 OFF I2C controller hex i/o109 OFF channel card power SU's         121 OFF I2C slave status110 OFF underdraft debugging            122 OFF I2C miscellaneous input111 OFF miscellaneous digital outputs   123 OFF enthusiastic backoff112 OFF arinc labels                    124 OFF PA mute debugging113 OFF channel card sw loads           125 OFF PA BITE status114 OFF all channel card THA codes      126 OFF calibrated power detectors115 OFF OCXO state toggles              127 OFF power supply dc current116 OFF DATA I/O passthrough mode       128 OFF VSWR monitoring117 OFF output to data i/o (ascii)      129 OFF I2C output to PAEnter 1 thru 203 to toggle report on/offX  turn off all reports    <CTRL> N  show next page    S   save to EEPROMESC  return to PREVIOUS MENU130 OFF misc temperatures               143 OFF next W'burg LDU131 OFF duart channel hex input         144 OFF W'burg state changes133 OFF LES access codes                145 OFF all input from CMU (hex)134 OFF MCDU/WSC #1 arinc input         146 OFF periodic messages from CMU135 OFF MCDU/WSC #2 arinc input         147 OFF arinc hex output to CMU136 OFF arinc output to MCDU/WSC        148 OFF USIM heater control137 OFF MCDU/WSC state machine          149 OFF AERO logging text -- no SU138 OFF ascii digital inputs            150 OFF ACARS P-channel RX data139 OFF W'burg messages to CMU          151 OFF all AERO SUs140 OFF W'burg messages from CMU (hex)  152 OFF AERO msg acks141 OFF W'burg messages from CMU        154 OFF non-periodic msgs to aero card142 OFF lo-level W'burg labels from CMU 155 OFF AES status table queriesEnter 1 thru 203 to toggle report on/offX  turn off all reports    <CTRL> N  show next page    S   save to EEPROMESC  return to PREVIOUS MENU156 OFF MCDU driver errors              168 OFF channel card reset cycles157 OFF ADC raw values                  169 OFF CMC arinc in158 OFF classic AERO call progress      170 OFF CMC arinc out159 OFF AES status                      171 OFF WSC data structs160 OFF AERO SUs for this terminal      172 OFF CMC data structs161 OFF 1252-A-3400 status              173 OFF vt100 CUG info162 OFF vt100 mcdu                      174 OFF BGAN registrations163 OFF periodic messages to CMU        175 OFF Alt Discrete status164 OFF enthusiastic digital inputs     176 OFF CP/SCM ORT I/O165 OFF 615 data loader upgrades        178 OFF power bursts166 OFF 615 data loader debugging       179 OFF channel card burst stats167 OFF max 615 debugging               180 OFF channel card burst trace
Enter 1 thru 203 to toggle report on/offX  turn off all reports    <CTRL> N  show next page    S   save to EEPROMESC  return to PREVIOUS MENU181 OFF data i/o call reports           194 OFF PA reset cycles182 OFF recovery after BGAN inert       195 OFF sys table protection algorithm183 OFF debug CC#1 rx parser            199 OFF classic AERO call status184 OFF debug CC#2 rx parser            202 OFF CFDS pages sent to CMC185 OFF dio / cc call matchup           203 OFF generic HD710 faults187 OFF antenna steering OLS labels     188 OFF over-power protection algorithm  1 OFF OFF messages to card #1189 OFF expanded IRS input               2 OFF OFF hex output to card #1190 OFF miscellaneous debugging          3 OFF OFF responses from card #1191 OFF WSCI telephony                   4 OFF OFF hex input from card #1192 OFF CMU status words                 5 OFF OFF card #1 misc info193 OFF output to antenna controller     6 OFF sb antenna arinc inputSYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-563 JUN 10Figure 4-13   HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU Reports(7) Activating Maintenance Reports To automatically generate report 23 (standard output) in Level 1 menu access, press the EQUAL SIGN. The report data output is repeated on the computer display at one-second intervals. Level 2 maintenance access provides more flexibility in the use of the reports function. This access level permits the activation or deactivation of any one of the reports (toggle on and off).(a) Reports General Guidelines • To open the report menu, press EQUAL SIGN. • To activate a report, type the number of the report needed, and then press ENTER. This toggles on the report number entered. To toggle the report off, type the report number again, and then press ENTER.  • To disable all reports (toggles all reports off), press X. • To display the next group of reports, press CTRL+N. • To save all selected reports to EEPROM, press S. The selected reports will then be output automatically when the maintenance port is accessed. If the items selected are not saved, they are de-activated when the system is reset or power is cycled to the terminal. • To start the scrolling report display, press ESC (in Level 2 access only). To return to the menu selection screen, press ESC again. (b) Report DescriptionsNot all the reports are used in the testing or troubleshooting of the system. This section describes only the more commonly used reports.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-573 JUN 101. Reports 23 and 94Report 23 is the most comprehensive report, giving a general impression of the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal health. An example of the contents of report 23 is shown in Figure 4-14. Table 4-17 provides an example and a brief description of the parameters. Each distinct parameter is numbered for description purposes.The output of report 23 scrolls continuously on screen and disrupts other items on screen. Report 94 provides identical information that does not disrupt other items on screen.18:42:31 dop ****  az 0.0 deg   el 45.0 deg  ant gain 12.0 (p/t)CHAN #1: C/No=40.6 dB Hz  sig=-42.4 dB    39.0 C  no dial beam=255 CHAN #2: C/No=40.7 dB Hz  sig=-41.4 dB    39.0 C  no dial beam=255 CHAN #3: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz  sig=  0.0 dB    38.0 C  log off beam=0 CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz  sig= -0.0 dB    39.0 C  no call beam=0 44D0'0.3"N  74D51'8.8"W  PT 0.0D  RL 0.0D  HD 83.9D  TK 0.0D  0 knots  ********Figure 4-14  Example Report 23 Output Table 4-17  Report 23 Item Descriptions Report 23 Text Description18:42:31 Time based on the system real time clockdop **** Doppler frequency offset; increases with velocity (see note below)az 0.0 deg Antenna azimuth pointing to the satellite, with respect to the nose of the aircraftel 45.0 deg Antenna elevation angle to the satellite, with respect to the horizontal position of the aircraftant gain 12.0 (p/t) Reported antenna gain for the selected antenna: starboard (sbd) or port (p/t)CHAN #1: Indicates the channel card for which results 14 to 17 relateC/No=40.6 dB Hz RF input Carrier-to-Noise (C/No) level; typically 50.0 to 55.0sig=-42.4 dB RF input signal level; not to exceed 0 when in-callNote: The signal level for channels 1, 2, 3,4, and 5 may be different.39.0 C  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal internal LRU temperatureNote: Operating the terminal above 55C is not recommended.no dial System call statusbeam=255 Satellite beam on which the card is registered44D0'0.3"N  74D51'8.8"W IRS lat/long as interpreted by the  HSD-440 Mark 2 TerminalPT 0.0D Aircraft pitch angle, where UP is positiveRL 0.0D Aircraft roll angle, where clockwise is positive
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-583 JUN 10NOTE: When the aircraft is stationary, the field may appear as a series of asterisks (*).2. Reports 5 and 17Report 5 displays information for channel card 1, and report 17 displays information for channel card 2.These reports are commonly used for testing and troubleshooting the system and are only available to Level 2, maintenance access users.You are prompted to select the channel(s) for which to generate a report:Figure 4-15  Prompt to Select Channel for Report GenerationThe options are: • 1 for channel 1 • 2 for channel 2 • B for both channels • X to deselect all channelsIn report 17 for channel card 2, you can select channel 3, channel 4, both channels, or deselect all channels.NOTE: Depending on the version of software installed and the user's selection of reports, the MPU reports displayed may differ from those shown in the example in Figure 4-16.CHAN #3: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz  sig=  0.0 dB log off beam=0  bt=OK oc=NA         tx          0 Hz  burst  0   38.0 C  int=8080Figure 4-16  Example of Report 17, Channel Card 2, Channel 33. Reports 8 and 20Report 8 displays the status of the starboard antenna, and report 20 displays the status of the port antenna. HD 83.9D Aircraft true heading; where the nose of the aircraft is pointing, based on yaw offsetTK 0.0D Aircraft true track; direction the aircraft is flying—not necessarily the direction it is pointing (see note below)0 knots Aircraft velocity5  WHICH GAN CHANNEL (1,2,B,X) ? Table 4-17  Report 23 Item Descriptions (Continued)Report 23 Text Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-593 JUN 10These reports are commonly used for testing and troubleshooting the system and are only available to Level 2, maint access users.NOTE: Depending on the version of software installed and the user's selection of reports, the MPU reports displayed may differ from those shown in the example in Figure 4-17.port status $608033  SDI: ACU  SSM: NORMAL  gain=12.0OMNIDIRECTIONAL MODE  open loop tracking  port/top active   HGA   LNA=onFigure 4-17  Example of Report 20Table 4-18 shows descriptions of the items in reports 8 and 20. Table 4-18  Reports 8 and 20 Item Descriptions Report 8 and 20 Starboard and Port Antenna Status(Hex code) - Raw hex code of the 32-bit ARINC word—decoded message follows code(SDI) - Antenna being used (for mechanically steered, only Port data is valid)(SSM) - Antenna serviceability(Gain) - Reported antenna gain (may vary with increased blockage or keyhole pointing)(Mode) - Reports tracking status, antenna selection, and high gain mode (LNA) - Power-on status4. Report 21Report 21 displays the call code information for the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.Figure 4-18 shows an example of report 21. Table 4-19 describes the items in report 21.23:48:36 #1 123ABC E4 start 400110 14.00 dBW  CT SP ocean region registration  41.5 C  51 dB Hz23:48:39 #1 123ABC E4 stop 8301  ACSE successful ORR  41.5 C  51 dB Hz23:49:20 #2 456DEF E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW  CT SP ocean region registration  41.5 C  52 dB Hz23:49:24 #2 456DEF E5 stop 8306  ACSE failed retry ORR  41.5 C  51 dB Hz23:49:27 #2 456DEF E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW  CT SP ocean region registration  41.5 C  52 dB Hz23:49:32 #2 456DEF E5 stop 8306  ACSE failed retry ORR  41.5 C  51 dB Hz23:49:36 #2 456DEF E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW  CT SP ocean region registration  41.5 C  51 dB Hz23:49:40 #2 456DEF E5 stop 8301  ACSE successful ORR  41.5 C  52 dB HzFigure 4-18  Example Report 21
 Table 4-19  Report 21 Item Descriptions Report 21 Call Codes(Time) - Time based on the system real time clock(Fwd Addr) - Forward address ID assigned to the system channel cards(Alpha/no.) - OR and beam the card is logged on to(Call) - Call real-time status, service type code, and Inmarsat Cause Code (see Appendix H: Inmarsat Cause Codes on page H-1)(RF power) - LES/GES requested HPA power in dBW(OR status) - OR registration status(Call orig) Call originating from MES or from a fixed location(Call type) Call types (for example, speech)SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-603 JUN 10D. Inmarsat Cause CodesThe fault definitions that appear in the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal maintenance menu logs are based directly on the cause code definitions provided by Inmarsat. Appendix H: Inmarsat Cause Codes on page H-1 defines the maintenance port menu fault codes of the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.E. Operational and Diagnostic Test ProceduresYou can perform all test procedures presented in this section to test the total operational status of the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. You can conduct these operational tests for all terminals returned to service after repair.The procedures assume that the technical personnel are familiar with the test equipment used and can operate the equipment to produce the required inputs and obtain the required results (indications). Refer to the detailed operating procedures and descriptions of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal  MPU included in this section.CAUTION: ONLY AUTHORIZED TECHNICAL PERSONNEL WHO ARE TRAINED IN GENERAL AVIATION WORKMANSHIP AND HAVE A BASIC UNDERSTANDING OF SATCOM SYSTEMS SHOULD PERFORM THE OPERATIONAL AND DIAGNOSTIC TEST PROCEDURES IN THIS MANUAL.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-613 JUN 10CAUTION: CHANGES TO DEFAULT VALUES FOR SOME MENU FUNCTIONS MAY SERIOUSLY DEGRADE SYSTEM OPERATION.NOTE: This manual describes the basic MPU functions, menus, and reports required for the testing and fault isolation procedures presented in this section. Please consult Honeywell Product Support before entering any unfamiliar menu selections not described in this manual.NOTE: Using a terminal emulation program, open a log file and save all test results for future reference and test records.NOTE: The procedures presented in this section aid technical personnel in upgrading, maintaining, or troubleshooting an  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. Maintenance does not imply lubrication or adjustment activities.Refer to the Outline and Installation diagrams and the Interconnection and Contact Assignment drawings presented in "Installation" on page 3-1 for additional information.(1) Test Setup ProcedureThe test setup procedure is presented in Table 4-20. For detailed connection of test equipment and operating instructions for the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU, see "Terminal Maintenance Port Utility" on page 4-36 Table 4-20  Test Setup Procedure Step Action1.0 Make sure that the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is powered down and disconnected from the power source.2.0 Connect a maintenance cable to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal front-panel or remote maintenance port connector.3.0 Connect the other end of the cable to the serial port of the computer.4.0 Open a log file to capture all test data.(2) Post TestWhen testing is completed, follow the steps in Table 4-21. Table 4-21  Post Test Procedure Step Action1.0 Save the log file of the test results (or data) for future reference.2.0 Remove power from the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal that was tested and from all other test equipment.3.0 Disconnect test equipment from the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.4.0 Replace the maintenance-port connector cover (if it was removed during the test setup).
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-623 JUN 10(3) Installation and Operational Verification TestsThe test procedures assume that an approved ARINC 741 compatible antenna subsystem has been completely installed and tested as per the manufacturer's instructions.To facilitate and document the installation of the equipment, refer to "Installation Checklist" on page E-1.(a) Pre Power-up ChecksCarry out all mechanical and electrical verification tests in the systematic order presented in this document.(b) Mechanical VerificationRefer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed mechanical information. Table 4-22 itemizes recommended mechanical checks. Table 4-22   HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Mechanical Verification STEP Item Checked Verification Description1. 0 Mounting trayPhysical placementMake sure that service/maintenance ports are accessible.Check that environmental characteristics and specifications are met, including cooling, air-flow, and pressure2. 0 Fan tray Confirm plug configuration is correct.Check chassis bonding.Make sure that fan rotation is unobstructed and rotates freely.3. 0 ARINC 600 connector Check polarized pins.(c) Electrical VerificationRefer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed electrical information. Table 4-23 itemizes the recommended electrical checks.When conducting the following tests, do not rack the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.WARNING: TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE, USE EXTREME CAUTION DURING THE VOLTAGE LEVEL MEASUREMENTS. Table 4-23   HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Electrical Verification Checklist STEP Item Checked Verification Description1.0 Power connections 28 V dc polarity or 115 V ac polarityChassis ground @ BP8—resistance measurement
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-633 JUN 10(4) Configuration Parameters VerificationYou can verify the system configuration parameters. For additional connection and access information, see "Connection Requirements" on page 4-37. Verify and document the parameters using the lists in "Installation Checklist" on page E-1.2.0 Voltage levels CAUTION: WHEN POWER IS APPLIED TO THE RACK, THE FAN ENERGIZES.Check voltage levels:28 V dc: between BP2 (positive) and BP3 (return)or115 V ac: between BPI (115-H) and BP7 (115-C)3.0 IRS Input IRS wiring:Inertial system wired to TP4J (A) and TP4K (B)IRS format: ARINC 429 Interface 4.0 Configuration Strap Pins SDI:Strapped for HGA, Pin TP5B to TP5DSystem configuration:Figure 3-9 and Figure 3-10ICAO ID:User specific address obtained from the aircraft registrationWOW: optional5.0 Ethernet 1 and 2 Wired or strapped to RJ45 distribution pointsOptional—other service may be preferred6.0 ISDN 1 Wired or strapped to RJ45 distribution pointsOptional—other service may be preferred7.0 CEPT-E1  Wired to CTU - optional8.0 Remotes (optional but recommended)Remote reset switchMaintenance port, remote accessPower and fault indicators9.0 RF coaxial Rx input cable loss from DLNA J2 to  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal at BP12Tx output cable loss from  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal at MPC1 to DLNA J310.0 Multi-control and BITE from antenna subsystemAntenna manufacturer and modelMulti-Control loopbacks installed at TP3E and TP3F Table 4-23   HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Electrical Verification Checklist (Continued)STEP Item Checked Verification Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-643 JUN 10(a) Parameter Verification Procedure • From Menu 3, press H (list SCM/CP ORT), and then press 1 (CP EEPROM ORT). The ORT listing appears on the screen, as shown in Figure 4-19. Verify that the correct system configuration parameters are listed in the ORT.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-653 JUN 100 lists SCM ORT -- 1 lists CP EEPROM ORT -- 2 lists CP ORT OPTIONS ? CP EEPROM ORT: ID A8E09293    VERSION 300264-WIRE #1 NOISE LEVEL:   -50                      SET BY MCDU4-WIRE #1 SPEAKER LEVEL:   50                     SET BY MAINT PORT4-WIRE #1 MIC LEVEL:    70                        SET BY MAINT PORT4-WIRE #1 SIDETONE LEVEL:   50                    SET BY MCDU4-WIRE #2 NOISE LEVEL:   -50                      SET BY MAINT PORT4-WIRE #2 SPEAKER LEVEL:   50                     SET BY MAINT PORT4-WIRE #2 MIC LEVEL:    70                        SET BY MAINT PORT4-WIRE #2 SIDETONE LEVEL:   50                    SET BY MAINT PORTMCDU TYPE:               HONEYWELL  NOT DEFAULT   SET BY MAINT PORTHSD SAL:                 307                      SET BY MAINT PORTLOG-ON/HANDOVER POLICY:    MANUAL  NOT DEFAULT    SET BY MAINT PORTHIGH RATE R/T IN GLOBAL BEAM:    DISABLED         SET BY MAINT PORTRESPONSE TO LOG-ON INTERROGATION:    DISABLED     SET BY MAINT PORTCMU INPUTS SPEED SELECT:    LOW RATE              SET BY MAINT PORTFORWARD ID:              123ABC    NOT DEFAULT    SET BY MAINT PORTAIR/GROUND STATUS RESTRICTIONS:    DISABLED       SET BY MAINT PORTHSD (HPA) - ANTENNA LOSS:    2.5 dB               SET BY MAINT PORTHIT 'H' for MORE  MAINT CMD EXECUTION IN AIR:    DISABLED           SET BY MAINT PORTTRANSMIT ON GROUND:      DISABLED                 SET BY MAINT PORTMCDU/WSCI #1 WIRED:      YES                      SET BY MAINT PORTMCDU/WSCI #2 WIRED:      YES                      SET BY MAINT PORTMCDU/WSCI #3 WIRED:      NO                       SET BY MAINT PORTCMU #1 WIRED:            YES                      SET BY MAINT PORTCMU #2 WIRED:            NO  NOT DEFAULT          SET BY MAINT PORTA/C GNSS EQUIPMENT:      GPS                      SET BY MAINT PORTPRIMARY IRS TYPE:        INERTIAL                 SET BY MAINT PORTSECONDARY IRS TYPE:      AES ID  NOT DEFAULT      SET BY MAINT PORTCMC TYPE:                BOEING                   SET BY MAINT PORTMCDU/WSCI CONTROLLER TYPE:    MCDU                SET BY MAINT PORTMCDU/WSCI INPUT SPEED:    LOW RATE                SET BY MAINT PORTMCDU/WSCI OUTPUT SPEED:    LOW RATE  NOT DEFAULT  SET BY MAINT PORTSECONDARY IRS INPUT SPEED SELECT:    HIGH RATE    SET BY MAINT PORTCOCKPIT CALL SIGNALLING MODE:    CD1/CD2 DISCRETE  NOT DEFAULT   SET BY MAINT PORTINSTALLED DIPLEXER TYPE:    TYPE F                SET BY MAINT PORTHIT 'H' for MORE  ANTENNA TYPE:            ARINC 741 HGA, TOP MOUNT   SET BY MAINT PORTALLOW MANUAL DIAL:       ENABLED                  SET BY MAINT PORTSELF-TEST IN AIR:        ENABLED  NOT DEFAULT     SET BY MAINT PORTANTENNA MOUNTING ROTATION ANGLE:    0.0 deg       SET BY MAINT PORTANTENNA MOUNTING PITCH ANGLE:    0.0 deg          SET BY MAINT PORTANTENNA MOUNTING ROLL ANGLE:    0.0 deg           SET BY MAINT PORTCMU-SDU HARD CODED SAL:    NO  NOT DEFAULT        SET BY MAINT PORTMCDU PAST:               ENABLED                  SET BY MAINT PORTCMU-SDU JOIN/LEAVE WORD TRANSMISSION:    PERIODIC   SET BY MAINT PORTNUMBER CG-710 INSTALLED:    0                     SET BY MAINT PORTNUMBER CR-710 INSTALLED:    0                     SET BY MAINT PORTCARD #1 SBB/S64 PRIORITY:    "SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6 REVERTING TO SWIFT64"   SET BY MAINT PORTSWIFTBROADBAND TIMING MODE:    NOT ASSISTED       SET BY MAINT PORTSW FIELD LOADABLE:       ENABLED  NOT DEFAULT     SET BY MAINT PORTSERVICE TYPE PRIORITY:    PUBLIC CORRESPONDENCE   SET BY MAINT PORTCEPT E1 WIRED:           YES                      SET BY MAINT PORTCMC WIRED:               YES  NOT DEFAULT         SET BY MAINT PORTHIT 'H' for MORE  CMC MASK FAULT:          DISABLED                 SET BY MAINT PORTMASK POSITION IN LOGS:    DISABLED                SET BY MAINT PORTICAO CODE SOURCE:        STRAP                    SET BY MAINT PORTCMU OUTPUT SPEED SELECT:    LOW RATE              SET BY MAINT PORTPOTS SERVICE:            ENABLED                  SET BY MAINT PORTCEPT E1 INTERFACE TYPE:    ARINC 746              SET BY MAINT PORTGROUND TO COCKPIT CALL ROUTING PREFERENCE:    4-WIRE #2  NOT DEFAULT   SET BY MAINT PORTGROUND PUBLIC ROUTING PREFERENCE:    COCKPIT  NOT DEFAULT   SET BY MAINT PORT4-WIRE #2 WIRED:         YES  NOT DEFAULT         SET BY MAINT PORTETHERNET #1 WIRED:       NO  NOT DEFAULT          SET BY MAINT PORTETHERNET #2 WIRED:       YES                      SET BY MAINT PORT
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-663 JUN 10MCDU FONT COLOUR:        ENABLED  NOT DEFAULT     SET BY MAINT PORTCOCKPIT OUTGOING CALL SIGNALING:    DISABLED      SET BY MAINT PORTCOCKPIT OUTGOING CALL PRE-SELECT:    ENABLED      SET BY MAINT PORTPIMBIT AZIMUTH OFFSET ANGLES:    SET BY MAINT PORT                                  HGA = 11.0 DEG  NOT DEFAULT                                 IGA = 15.0 DEG  NOT DEFAULTPIMBIT IGA ELEVATION ANGLES:    SET BY MAINT PORT                                  ANGLE 1 = 18.0 DEG  NOT DEFAULT                                 ANGLE 2 = 12.5 DEG  NOT DEFAULT                                                  PIMBIT HGA ELEVATION ANGLES:    SET BY MAINT PORT                                  ANGLE 1 = 27.6 DEG  NOT DEFAULT                                 ANGLE 2 = 12.5 DEG  NOT DEFAULT                                                  HIT 'H' for MORE  PIMBIT TEST CRITERIA:    SET BY MAINT PORT                          MEASUREMENT DISCARD RATIO = 25.5%  NOT DEFAULT                         FAILURE THRESHOLD = 25.5 dB  NOT DEFAULT                         POINTING FAILURE THRESHOLD = 255  NOT DEFAULT                                                  HIT 'H' for MORE  DIO BLOCK:  86 BYTES -- TYPE 1 CRC D3CD  de 8e 6a 67 00 50 de 96 e9 74 00 39 1c b6 5b b5     ..jg.P...t.9..[.  0c 8f 09 6e 1c d2 5b 2e de 92 88 f0 00 09 0c 96     ...n..[.........  e8 62 87 a2 fc f4 79 de ce eb 70 00 0e ac d3 2c     .b....y...p....,  29 c0 a8 00 05 9b d3 2c 30 00 a1 de 82 6d 30 00     )......,0....m0.  04 1c d2 69 6e de c3 0b e5 00 0b c7 86 3b ad 06     ...in........;..  44 61 74 61 49 4f                                   DataIOETHERNET 1 ADDRESS  192.168.0.1ETHERNET 1 MASK  255.255.255.0ETHERNET 2 ADDRESS  0.0.0.0ETHERNET 2 MASK  255.255.255.0DHCP CLIENT  DISABLEDHOST NAME  DataIODHCP SERVER  DISABLEDSTART OF MANAGED RANGE  192.168.0.100SNMP SERVER  ENABLEDSNMP COMMUNITY STRING  publicNUMBER OF MANAGED ADDRESSES  50TFTP SERVER  DISABLEDETHERNET DUPLEX MODE  0TELNET ACCESS  ENABLEDALLOW SCPC SESSIONS  TRUEALLOW MPDS SESSIONS  TRUEALLOW BGAN SESSIONS  TRUEACCESS CONCENTRATOR NAME  DataIODEFAULT PPPOE SERVICE  PacketDataACCESS POINT NAME  AT WELCOME MESSAGE  HIT 'H' for MORE  VP BLOCK:  MISSINGTOOL VERSION = XXXXTOOL NAME = EMBEDDED ORT TOOLTOOL PART NUMBER = jaytoolSECURE ORT PART NUMBER = sss123USER ORT PART NUMBER = uuu456SATELLITE TABLE:REGION 0:     AORW (W)  52.0W   CLASSIC AERO   SWIFT64REGION 1:     AORE (E)  15.5W   CLASSIC AERO   SWIFT64REGION 2:      POR (P) 178.0E   CLASSIC AERO   SWIFT64REGION 3:      IOR (I)  64.0E   CLASSIC AERO   SWIFT64REGION 4:    MTSAT (4) 142.5E   CLASSIC AEROREGION 5:     APAC (5) 143.5E   CLASSIC AERO   BGANREGION 6:     EMEA (6)  25.0E   CLASSIC AERO   BGANREGION 7: AMERICAS (7)  98.0W   CLASSIC AERO   BGAN
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-673 JUN 10Figure 4-19  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ORT Display ExampleLES INFORMATION:      AORW: LES 2    NETWORK ID 0   LES 2      AORE: LES 2    NETWORK ID 0   NO NAME       POR: LES 2    NETWORK ID 0   NO NAME       IOR: LES 2    NETWORK ID 0   NO NAMESATELLITE FREQUENCY TABLE:REGION 0: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF  AERO PSID FREQS: $3702,$6B8  NCS FREQS: $24EC,$4EC  REGION 1: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF  AERO PSID FREQS: $36FE,$6B6  NCS FREQS: $2504,$B60  REGION 2: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF  AERO PSID FREQS: $36B4,$700  NCS FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF  REGION 3: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF  AERO PSID FREQS: $36B2,$6FC  NCS FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF  REGION 4: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF  AERO PSID FREQS: $38F7,$8F7  NCS FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF  REGION 5: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS: $2AF2,$2A  AERO PSID FREQS: $36DA,$6DA  NCS FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF REGION 6: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS: $2BA0,$9E  AERO PSID FREQS: $36DE,$6DE  NCS FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF  REGION 7: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS: $2A4C,$4  AERO PSID FREQS: $36DC,$6DC  NCS FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF HIT 'H' for MORE GES PRIORITY TABLE:ENTRY #1  AORW   Aussaguel            (GES 5)    PRIORITY 5ENTRY #2  AORW   Eik                  (GES 2)    PRIORITY 5ENTRY #3  AORE   Aussaguel            (GES 103)  PRIORITY 5ENTRY #4  AORE   Eik                  (GES 104)  PRIORITY 5ENTRY #5  POR    Perth                (GES 205)  PRIORITY 5ENTRY #6  POR    Santa Paula          (GES 202)  PRIORITY 5ENTRY #7  IOR    Perth                (GES 305)  PRIORITY 5ENTRY #8  IOR    Eik                  (GES 301)  PRIORITY 5ENTRY #9  APAC   Hawaii               (GES 120)  PRIORITY 5ENTRY #10 EMEA   Fucino               (GES 220)  PRIORITY 5ENTRY #11 AMERICAS Hawaii               (GES 320)  PRIORITY 5ENTRY #12 MTSAT  Kobe                 (GES 161)  PRIORITY 5PHONE BOOK CATEGORY 1  (CATEGORY01):   95          AAAAB      0016135919208 OP-LO    96         JJJJJJ             666666 OP-LO    97           CCCC               5555 OP-LO    98         QQQQQQ           55555555 NON-OP   99      ALPHATEXT             999999 OP-LO   100          DDDDD              99999 OP-LO PHONE BOOK CATEGORY 2  (CATEGORY02):   91          HHHHH              22222 OP-LO    92         KKKKKK              11111 OP-LO    94           BBBA              22222 OP-LO    95           CCCC               9999 OP-LO    96          AAAAB              11111 OP-LO    97          LLLLL              33333 OP-LO    98          AAAAA              22222 OP-LO    99           AAAA              66666 OP-LO   100 01-NUM IN CAT2      0116135601122 OP-HI PHONE BOOK CATEGORY 3  (CATEGORY03):   96          BBBBB              88888 OP-LO    97          AAAAC               2222 OP-LO    98          BBBBA              22222 OP-LO    99          AAAAA              22222 OP-LO   100 01-NUM IN CAT3      0116135601123 OP-LO PHONE BOOK CATEGORY 4  (CATEGORY04):   95         AAAAAB              77777 OP-LO    96          CCCCC              11114 OP-LO    97          AAAAC              33333 OP-LO    99           AAAA               5555 OP-LO   100 01-NUM IN CAT4      0116135601124 NON-OPDONE
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-683 JUN 10(5) System Power-up ChecksNOTE: Before proceeding, make sure that all pre power-up, mechanical, and electrical verifications have been successfully performed and documented using "Installation Checklist" on page E-1.(a) PreparationThe following tests serve primarily to confirm proper system power-up; therefore, they can be performed while the aircraft is still in the hangar. Make sure that a computer is available for testing.(b) Initial Visual LED VerificationThe system's Power On and Fault LEDs provide a visual status indication on the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal front panel and on the optional remote panel. To visually verify LEDs: 1. Verify that the LED indicators (at both locations) repeatedly cycle on/off when power is applied. 2. Once the cycle has completed (~5 seconds), verify that the LED power indicator remains illuminated.(c) Initial Computer Power up DisplayWith the computer connected and configured to accept maintenance port data, power-up the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, and verify the initial power-up screen displays, as shown in Figure 4-20.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-693 JUN 10 KERNEL V1.7 -- Wed Mar 24 13:09:23 2010TESTING RAM ......RAM OK.             CONFIDENTIAL PROPERTY OF EMS TECHNOLOGIES CANADA, LTD.           USE AND DISTRIBUTION LIMITED SOLELY TO AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL.The use, disclosure, reproduction, modification, transfer or transmittal ofthis work for any purpose, in any form, or by any means without the writtenpermission of EMS Technologies Canada, Ltd. is strictly prohibited.      Copyright 2010 EMS Technologies Canada, Ltd.  All Rights ReservedHSD APPLICATION V22.006 -- Wed Apr 07 10:01:30 2010CMC INTERFACE: SUPPORTED              WSC INTERFACE:  SUPPORTEDVALIDATING DETECTOR CALIBRATION TABLES....  OKVALIDATING ATTENUATOR CALIBRATION TABLE AT $608000....  OKRAM RUN-TIME DATABASE    OCEAN REGION               SAT LONG   LES ID   TNID   SERVICES  **W AORW         (region #0)   54.0W      2       0     SW64/AERO  **E AORE         (region #1)   15.0W      2       0     SW64/AERO  **P POR          (region #2)  178.5E      2       0     SW64/AERO  **I IOR          (region #3)   64.5E      2       0     SW64/AERO  **4 MTSAT        (region #4)  142.5E                    AERO  **5 APAC         (region #5)  144.0E                    AERO/SBB  **6 EMEA         (region #6)   25.5E                    AERO/SBB  **7 AMERICAS     (region #7)   97.5W                    AERO/SBB**  LONGITUDE UPDATED FROM AERO BULLETIN BOARDSREAL TIME CLOCK PRESENT:  12:50:18 Wed Jan 2, 2001FORWARD ID TABLE -- VERSION 1CHANNEL #1 FORWARD ID 442BF54.7 SECONDS: STAND-ALONE MODEFIRMWARE VERSIONS:   KERNEL:           V1.7 -- Wed Mar 24 13:09:23 2010   APPLICATION:      V22.006 -- Wed Apr 07 10:01:30 2010   CHANNEL CARD #1:  4.9.G.0 -- 1.0.2.0 -- 2.1.0.0 -- 4.2.3.0   CHANNEL CARD #2:  31.5.0.1 --    DATA I/O CARD:    Version 1.87.0.0 built on Mar 16 2010 12:15:16   VOICE PROCESSOR:  Version 1.2.3.DEV built on Mar 31 2010 at 23:27:20   VP BOOT LOADER:   Version 1.2.1 built on Wednesday October 21 2009 at 14:04:24   SPOTBEAM TABLE:   PROVIDED BY SATELLITECHANNEL CARD STATISTICSCARD #1  BGAN 6X  (SERIAL 6203):      3036.1 hrs powered  266.6 hrs in call since 10:40:26 Feb 12, 2009CARD #2  CLASSIC AERO  (SERIAL 36500):      2635.1 hrs powered  1507.3 hrs in call since 10:17:37 Feb 27, 2001BGAN INTERFACE          IMEI       SVN        IMSICARD #1            12345678912345  01    987654321123456CHECKING FLASHPROM CONFIGURATION  .............HARDWARE:            PART NUMBER        REVISION     EMS:   1252-A-3800-01     A01
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-703 JUN 10Figure 4-20  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Power-Up Display Example(6) System On-Air ChecksConduct system on-air checks to confirm voice and data call capabilities through the satellite and ground station network. Additional testing confirms that proper signal level parameters are obtained through the antenna subsystem.(a) PreparationBefore attempting on-air testing procedures: 1. Complete and confirm all service provider registration and activation.  2. Complete and document all pre power-up and power-up checks. 3. Position the aircraft outside, away from all obstructions in the line-of-sight to the satellite. 4. Apply the aircraft power source. 5. Power on and wait for the IRS to align. 6. Connect a computer (with a terminal emulation program) to the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal maintenance port.NOTE: Several system parameters, such as IRS data, RF signal quality, and logon messaging, appear on the maintenance port display. Capture and save this maintenance port information to a file for later review or to serve as a historical test record.(b) On-Air Power up and Logon ProcedureFor this test procedure, use the Level 2 password to access the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU. For information on how to connect to, access, and use the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU, see "Connection Requirements" on page 4-37.To perform an on-air power up and logon:  1. With the computer connected, powered up, and ready to accept maintenance port data, power up the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. 2. Once the power up messages appear, type the Level 2 password maint.SOFTWARE:            PART NUMBER        REVISION     EMS:   LI-1252-38015      XXX     BOOT CRC:   5249CAFF     APP. CRC:   A3A3D6B7    CC #1 CRC:   CBA1        CC #2 CRC:   9F4E       SECURE ORT:   sss123                  ** MODIFIED **     USER ORT:   uuu456                  ** MODIFIED **Type "menu" to activate the maintenance port menus.Other passwords provide different levels of authorization.time 21.5 seconds: powering on channel card 2time 23.1 seconds: powering on channel card 1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-713 JUN 10 3. To access the reports menu, press EQUAL SIGN, and then activate reports 21 (call codes) and 23 (standard output). Remember to save these selected items by pressing S (save to EEPROM). 4. To reset the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, in Menu 2, press Z, and then immediately type the password maint when the reset messages appear.The data from the previously selected reports 21 and 23 appears. This data refreshes on-screen every second. You can capture this information in a log file for later review or pause the display by pressing SCROLL LOCK or highlighting part of the viewed data. 5. Compare the output data to the sample shown in Figure 4-21.You can review and document several parameters for operational verification purposes. Refer to "Installation Checklist" on page E-1 for a detailed list of parameters. 6. Verify that the following system information, as shown on the System Initialization Display during the test, is accurate for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal under test.  • FWD ID • Installation mode • Number of channel cards • All channel cards trigger OR registration(c) On-Air Voice/Data Call VerificationOnce the system has logged on, place a test voice and/or data call. Refer to "System Operation" on page 2-1 for detailed call procedures. Verification of all aircraft communication functions is recommended. Record the test call result on "Installation Checklist" on page E-1.NOTE: For the purposes of providing a sample display, an ISDN voice call is documented.(d) On-Air Voice/Data Call Verification ProcedureTo place an on-air voice or data call: 1. Make sure that the maintenance port reports 21 and 23 are activated. 2. Place a test call.  3. Observe the maintenance port messages, and verify that they are similar to the sample provided in Figure 4-21.
45D0'0.0"N  75D0'0.2"W  PT 0.0D  RL 0.0D  HD 0.0D  TK 0.0D  0 knots  0 ft17:12:39 dop 0 ppb  az 112.2 deg   el 12.2 deg  AORE  ant gain 12.0 (sbd)CHAN #1: C/No=51.4 dB Hz  sig=-31.4 dB    41.5 C  no call beam=4 CHAN #2: C/No=51.5 dB Hz  sig=-32.6 dB    41.5 C  no call beam=5 CHAN #3: C/No=48.9 dB Hz  sig=-26.1 dB    40.0 C  log on  beam=4 CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz  sig= -0.0 dB    40.5 C  no call beam=4 45D0'0.0"N  75D0'0.2"W  PT 0.0D  RL 0.0D  HD 0.0D  TK 0.0D  0 knots  0 ft17:12:40 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 14.00 dBW  mobile aero 64k speech  41.5 C  52 dB Hz17:12:40 dop 0 ppb  az 112.2 deg   el 12.2 deg  AORE  ant gain 12.0 (sbd)CHAN #1: C/No=51.5 dB Hz  sig=-32.2 dB    41.5 C  speech  beam=4 CHAN #2: C/No=51.6 dB Hz  sig=-32.9 dB    41.5 C  no call beam=5 CHAN #3: C/No=49.3 dB Hz  sig=-26.2 dB    40.0 C  log on  beam=4 CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz  sig= -0.0 dB    40.5 C  no call beam=4 45D0'0.0"N  75D0'0.2"W  PT 0.0D  RL 0.0D  HD 0.0D  TK 0.0D  0 knots  0 ft17:12:42 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 22.50 dBW  mobile aero 64k speech  41.5 C  52 dB Hz17:12:42 dop 0 ppb  az 112.2 deg   el 12.2 deg  AORE  ant gain 12.0 (sbd)CHAN #1: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz  sig=-1000 dB    41.5 C  speech  beam=4 CHAN #2: C/No=51.6 dB Hz  sig=-33.7 dB    41.5 C  no call beam=5 CHAN #3: C/No=49.3 dB Hz  sig=-26.2 dB    40.0 C  log on  beam=4 CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz  sig= -0.0 dB    40.5 C  no call beam=4 45D0'0.0"N  75D0'0.2"W  PT 0.0D  RL 0.0D  HD 0.0D  TK 0.0D  0 knots  0 ft17:12:44 dop 0 ppb  az 112.2 deg   el 12.2 deg  AORE  ant gain 12.0 (sbd)CHAN #1: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz  sig=-19.6 dB    41.5 C  speech  beam=4 CHAN #2: C/No=51.6 dB Hz  sig=-32.7 dB    41.5 C  no call beam=5 CHAN #3: C/No=48.9 dB Hz  sig=-25.8 dB    40.0 C  log on  beam=4 CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz  sig= -0.0 dB    40.5 C  no call beam=4 45D0'0.0"N  75D0'0.2"W  PT 0.0D  RL 0.0D  HD 0.0D  TK 0.0D  0 knots  0 ft17:12:49 dop 0 ppb  az 112.2 deg   el 12.2 deg  AORE  ant gain 12.0 (sbd)CHAN #1: C/No=62.2 dB Hz  sig=-19.9 dB    41.5 C  speech  beam=4 CHAN #2: C/No=51.8 dB Hz  sig=-32.6 dB    41.5 C  no call beam=5 CHAN #3: C/No=48.9 dB Hz  sig=-25.9 dB    40.0 C  log on  beam=4 CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz  sig= -0.0 dB    40.5 C  no call beam=4 45D0'0.0"N  75D0'0.2"W  PT 0.0D  RL 0.0D  HD 0.0D  TK 0.0D  0 knots  0 ft17:12:51 dop 0 ppb  az 112.2 deg   el 12.2 deg  AORE  ant gain 12.0 (sbd)CHAN #1: C/No=61.8 dB Hz  sig=-19.8 dB    41.5 C  speech  beam=4 CHAN #2: C/No=51.7 dB Hz  sig=-32.9 dB    41.5 C  no call beam=5 CHAN #3: C/No=48.9 dB Hz  sig=-25.9 dB    40.0 C  log on  beam=4 CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz  sig= -0.0 dB    40.5 C  no call beam=4 45D0'0.0"N  75D0'0.2"W  PT 0.0D  RL 0.0D  HD 0.0D  TK 0.0D  0 knots  0 ft17:12:52 #1 ABC123 E4 stop 1001  call cleared by MES terminal  41.5 C  0 dB Hz17:12:52 dop 0 ppb  az 112.2 deg   el 12.2 deg  AORE  ant gain 12.0 (sbd)CHAN #1: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz  sig=-1000 dB    41.5 C  no call beam=4 CHAN #2: C/No=51.8 dB Hz  sig=-32.6 dB    41.5 C  no call beam=5 CHAN #3: C/No=48.8 dB Hz  sig=-26.1 dB    40.0 C  log on  beam=4 CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz  sig= -0.0 dB    40.5 C  no call beam=4 45D0'0.0"N  75D0'0.2"W  PT 0.0D  RL 0.0D  HD 0.0D  TK 0.0D  0 knots  0 ftSYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-723 JUN 10Figure 4-21   HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Call Display Example(7) Antenna Tracking ChecksAs a final ground-based system check, verify the antenna tracking. This confirms proper signal reception and transmission for all aircraft headings.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-733 JUN 10(a) Preparation • Perform all previous tests and document the results before proceeding.  • As directed in previous tests, connect a computer to the maintenance port and use the Level 2 password to access the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU. • Power up all avionics and align the IRS. • Taxi or tow the aircraft to an unobstructed, line-of-sight location where a complete 360° rotation is possible.(b) Antenna Tracking Verification ProcedureTo verify antenna tracking:NOTE: Report 8 (starboard antenna status word) is only required where conformal antennas are installed. 1. From the reports menu, toggle on reports 8, 20, and 23.  2. Position the aircraft at a baseline, start-of-test heading (0 degrees true heading is recommended). 3. Confirm that the baseline heading, as reported by the aircraft IRS, is similar to that reported from the "HD" entry in report 23. 4. Record the following data on the "Installation Checklist" on page E-1: • Antenna selected—port or starboard (conformal only) • Antenna gain and azimuth angle • Heading • Channel card C/No and signal levels 5. Rotate the aircraft through a full 360° circle while stopping to record data at the following heading intervals: • For conformal or phased arrays: every 15° • For mechanically steered antenna: every 30°(8) Optional System ChecksThe following procedures are recommended but not essential. However, they serve to confirm successful completion of all previous tests.(a) PreparationActivate reports 21 and 23 for the following checks.(b) Optional Voice/Data Calls ProcedureNOTE: As in previous tests, open a log file to capture all maintenance port activity during aircraft taxiing, flight, and landing segments. • Voice/data calls—ground segment: Place any combination of voice and/or data calls while the aircraft is taxied in a full circle and/or a figure 8 pattern. Note any voice or data anomalies.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-743 JUN 10 • Voice/data calls—in flight: Place any combination of voice and/or data calls during flight. The flight pattern may include "standard rate of turn," figure 8, or circles. Note any voice or data anomalies.2. Troubleshooting and Fault IsolationThis section provides troubleshooting procedures for  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals experiencing faults during the commissioning process or previously operational terminals now considered as not working.Troubleshooting procedures require data obtained using the MPU of the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals. For specific instructions on how to access and use the maintenance port and MPU, refer to "Connection Requirements" on page 4-37.A. Troubleshooting PracticesTroubleshooting practices for the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal fall into two categories: non-specific and specific complaints.(1) Non-specific ComplaintsWhen troubleshooting terminals with non-specific complaints, complete all system verification and functional tests starting on page 4–60. Document whether the terminal passes or fails each test.If the terminal passes all tests and no fault is discovered, all associated equipment and aircraft wiring should be tested. If the terminal fails a specific test, isolate the actual fault or faults by performing the troubleshooting procedures provided in this section.(2) Specific ComplaintsWhen troubleshooting terminals with specific complaints, you can proceed directly to the applicable troubleshooting and fault isolation procedure provided in this section.B. Equipment RequiredThe equipment required for troubleshooting and fault isolation is the same as the equipment required for test purposes, as listed in "Test and Fault Isolation Equipment Requirements" on page 4-35.C. Troubleshooting AidsThis section presents examples of maintenance screens and troubleshooting tables to assist in troubleshooting and fault isolation activities. The exact screen display may vary depending on the version of the terminal's operational software and installation configuration mode. NOTE: The screens used in the figures presented in this section may have been edited for clarity and illustrative purposes.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-753 JUN 10(1) Fault Isolation Screen DisplaysFigure 4-22 to Figure 4-31 provide example maintenance screens for reference and illustration purposes. time 8.6 seconds: powering on channel card #2card is already onSENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMANDtime 22.1 seconds CHAN #2 CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING ORR IN AORE!!SENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMANDtime 22.5 seconds CHAN #1 CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING ORR IN AORE!!10:45:14 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW  CT SP ocean region registration  32.0 C  54 dB Hz10:45:15 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW  CT SP ocean region registration  32.0 C  55 dB Hz10:45:18 #2 ABC456 E5 stop 8301  ACSE successful ORR  32.0 C  54 dB Hz10:45:19 #1 ABC123 E5 stop 8306  ACSE successful ORR  32.0 C  54 dB HzFigure 4-22  Successful OR Registration (report 21 activated)10:45:14 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW  CT SP ocean region registration  32.0 C  54 dB Hz10:45:15 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW  CT SP ocean region registration  32.0 C  55 dB Hz10:45:18 #2 ABC456 E5 stop 8301  ACSE failed retry ORR  32.0 C  54 dB Hz10:45:19 #1 ABC123 E5 stop 8306  ACSE failed retry ORR  32.0 C  54 dB HzFigure 4-23  Failed OR Registration15:14:08 dop 0 ppb  az 112.2 deg   el 12.2 deg  AORE  ant gain 12.0 (p/t)CHAN #1: C/No=51.8 dB Hz  sig=-32.2 dB    42.5 C  no call beam=4 CHAN #2: C/No=51.5 dB Hz  sig=-32.6 dB    42.5 C  no call beam=4 CHAN #3: C/No=48.9 dB Hz  sig=-24.2 dB    41.0 C  log on  beam=4 CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz  sig= -0.0 dB    41.5 C  no call beam=4 45D0'0.0"N  75D0'0.2"W  PT 0.0D  RL 0.0D  HD 0.0D  TK 0.0D  0 knots  0 ftFigure 4-24  No Call (report 23)15:15:04 #1 442BF5 E4 start 800124 14.00 dBW  mobile aero 64k speech  42.5 C  52 dB Hz15:15:03 dop 0 ppb  az 112.2 deg   el 12.2 deg  AORE  ant gain 12.0 (p/t)CHAN #1: C/No=51.8 dB Hz  sig=-32.6 dB    42.5 C  speech  beam=4 CHAN #2: C/No=51.6 dB Hz  sig=-33.4 dB    42.5 C  no call beam=4 CHAN #3: C/No=48.9 dB Hz  sig=-24.5 dB    41.0 C  log on  beam=4 CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz  sig= -0.0 dB    41.0 C  no call beam=4 45D0'0.0"N  75D0'0.2"W  PT 0.0D  RL 0.0D  HD 0.0D  TK 0.0D  0 knots  0 ftFigure 4-25  In Call—Swift 64 Voice Call on Channel 1 (reports 21 and 23)
12:43:55 dop****  az 285.4 deg   el 15.3 deg  AOR EAST  ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=52.9 dB/Hz  sig=-33.9 dB   27 C  no call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=52.9 dB/Hz  sig=-34.2 dB   27 C  no call beam=4 ************  ***********  *********  ********  *********  *******  *******CARD #1: C/No=52.4.0 dB/Hz  sig=-33.6 dB   27 C  in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=52.4 dB/Hz  sig=-34.5 dB   27 C    no call beam=4 ************  ***********  *********  ********  *********  *******  *******SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-763 JUN 10Figure 4-26  No IRS Data (report 23 activated)FORWARD ID TABLE -- VERSION 1**** strapping identifies forward id ffffff -- not in table ******** eeprom forward id 000000 not in table *****7.6 SECONDS: EEPROM FORCES STAND-ALONE MODEtime 18.0 seconds: powering on channel card #1time 18.0 seconds: powering on channel card #2** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** WARNINGS ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** *CHANNEL CARD FORWARD ID IS ZERO** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** **\Figure 4-27  FWD ID Not Strapped (no reports activated)
      MENU 3                            FIRMWARE Vx.xL     list EEPROM                       S     list event logC     clear event log                   M     misc.  EEPROM parameterF     list call log                     G     clear call logO     list ORT                          P     ocean region parameterI     set all LES id's<CTRL> N  next menu      <CTRL> O  previous menu      =  select reportsG     clear call log<CTRL> N  next menu      <CTRL> O  previous menu      =  select reportsHPA ERROR CODE 1800hit '0' for complete log   '1' for 'special' events   '-' for specific entryFAULT (ENTRY #1428):  address ABC123: 30 seconds after poweruppowerup #204  389 hours operation  Jan 01 14:19:39 2006ERROR CODE 40HPA FAULT -- 0x1800HPA MAINTENANCE WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNAHPA STATUS WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNAContinuous Power Requests From LES, Report 21 activated:10:51:26 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW  CT SP ocean region registration 30 C 54 dB/Hz10:51:26 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW  CT SP ocean region registration 29 C 54 dB/Hz10:51:27 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW  CT SP ocean region registration 30 C10:51:27 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW  CT SP ocean region registration 29 C10:51:27 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW  CT SP ocean region registration 29 C 0 dB/Hz10:51:27 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW  CT SP ocean region registration 30 C 0 dB/Hz10:51:29 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 29 C 54 dB/Hz10:51:29 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 30 C 54 dB/Hz10:51:29 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW  CT SP ocean region registration 30 CSYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-773 JUN 10Figure 4-28  No Strap on SDI Lines, Open (no reports activated)
Log-on password entered: "Maint"      MENU 1                             FIRMWARE Vx.xX     override forward id               L     test LEDsY     explain error status              U     list event log (hex)F     print equipment stats             M     clear equipment stats<CTRL> N  next menu      <CTRL> O  previous menu      =  select reportsHPA UNCONTROLLEDY command entered:HPA MAINTENANCE WORD REPORTING ARINC ERRORHPA MAINTENANCE WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNAHPA STATUS WORD REPORTING INVALID SSM 1 (NO COMPUTED DATA)HPA STATUS WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNAEvent log messages:       MENU 3                            FIRMWARE Vx.xL     list EEPROM                       S     list event logC     clear event log                   M     misc.  EEPROM parameterF     list call log                     G     clear call logO     list ORT                          P     ocean region parameterI     set all LES id's<CTRL> N  next menu      <CTRL> O  previous menu      =  select reportsFAULT (ENTRY #1422):  address ABC123: 30 seconds after powerup  powerup #203  389 hours operation  Jun 03 11:15:07 2003  ERROR CODE 40   HPA FAULT -- 0x1c80   HPA MAINTENANCE WORD REPORTING ARINC ERROR   HPA MAINTENANCE WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA   HPA STATUS WORD REPORTING INVALID SSM 1 (NO COMPUTED DATA)   HPA STATUS WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNASYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-783 JUN 10Figure 4-29  Wrong Strap on SDI Lines (TP5A to GND)11:47:43 #2 ABC456 E4 stop 8301  ACSE successful ORR 30 C  50 dB/Hz11:47:46 #1 ABC123 E5 stop 8301  ACSE successful ORR 28 C  50 dB/Hz11:47:55 #1 ABC123 E5 start 800124 14.00 dBW  mobile aero 64k speech 29 C  47 dB/Hz11:47:57 #1 ABC123 E5 start 800124 22.50 dBW  mobile aero 64k speech 28 C  47 dB/Hzcalling 0116135919064#11:48:10 #1 ABC123 E5 stop 11d2 call failed, insufficient digits in service address 28 C 0 calling 0116135919064#Figure 4-30  Incorrect Dialing Format (report 52 enabled)
OMNIDIRECTIONAL MODE  open loop tracking  port/top active   HGA   LNA onport maintenance  0x00600003port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12  maint 600003 SDI=ACUport ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12  maint 600003 SDI=ACUport ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12  maint 600003 SDI=ACUport ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12  maint 600003 SDI=ACUport ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12  maint 600003 SDI=ACUport status:  0x608033  SDI: ACU  SSM: NORMAL OPERATION  gain: 12OMNIDIRECTIONAL MODE  open loop tracking  port/top active   HGA   LNA onport maintenance  0x00600003port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12  maint 600003 SDI=ACUport ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12  maint 600003 SDI=ACUport ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12  maint 600003 SDI=ACUport ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12  maint 600003 SDI=ACUSYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-793 JUN 10Figure 4-31  Top/Port Antenna Status (reports 18, 19, and 20 activated)(2) Troubleshooting TableTable 4-24 provides troubleshooting procedures for basic  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal faults. Before starting a troubleshooting procedure, access the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU using the maint password. For detailed connection and user instructions, see "Connection Requirements" on page 4-37.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-803 JUN 10 Table 4-24  Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation Fault Description Maintenance Report  CheckRed LED remains on after power-up• HPA uncontrolled• HPA fault View power-up display of the MPU• Verify that the multicontrol, loopback is wired (out to in).HPA error status • reporting invalid SSM• HPA not reporting status word 143• HPA not reporting maintenance word 350• HPA maintenance word reporting ARINC error• HPA maintenance word not reporting HGA antenna• HPA maintenance word reporting VSWR error• HPA maintenance word reporting RAM error• HPA reporting ROM error• HPA maintenance word reporting power supply error• HPA maintenance word reporting temperature errorTo obtain an explanation of the HPA error status, in Menu 1, press Y• Check that the external power source is properly connected and meets installation requirements.• Check that the transmit path from  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal output (MPC1) to the antenna subsystem (e.g., coaxial cables, splitters, and relays).• Check that the installation location meets the RTCA/DO-160E environmental specifications.• Check for proper fan-tray operation and air-cooling. • Verify the fan-tray plug distribution is as per the installation requirements.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-813 JUN 10Call failure IRS information not available Activate maintenance reports 21 and 23• Check that the IRS systems are powered on and aligned.• Check that connections to the IRS systems are secured.• Check the polarity of IRS input lines.• If no IRS data is available, use Menu 10 to manually input navigational data to point the antenna to a preferred satellite location and try the call again.System does not log on to the global beam Activate maintenance reports 21 and 23• Check that the IRS data is received and valid.• Make sure that a valid FWD ID is read.• Verify that the antenna is pointing in the correct direction.• Make sure that LES/GES access codes are configured correctly.• Verify all coaxial connections.System does not log on to the correct OR Activate maintenance reports 21 and 23• Check that the IRS data is received and valid.• Check for antenna line-of-sight interference.Terminal is not transmitting Activate maintenance reports 21 and 23• Check for a defective or loose RF cable.• Verify that the Rx RF level is acceptable.• Check RF power level displayed in maintenance port menu report 21; the EIRP should be requested at 14.00 dBW, but when in call, power level should increase to 22.5 dBW and then level off to approximately 16 dBW.• Make sure that the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is secured properly to the ARINC connector in the tray. Table 4-24  Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation (Continued)Fault Description Maintenance Report  Check
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-823 JUN 10Call failure (cont’d) ICAO is invalid or strapped incorrectly Activate maintenance report 21To check ICAO, in Menu 4, press Q• The account registration process has not been completed. Check your account status with your service provider to make sure that the account registration has been processed into the LES/GES databases and your account is valid.• If the message, Channel card stuck in boot state appears in the event log, check that the assigned ICAO is strapped correctly.Terminal is strapped to an incorrect system mode of installationIn Menu 3, press L (List EEPROM) • Verify the system mode strapping is correct. • Reset the system and observe the initialization display; it shows that the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is powering up and displays the terminal’s self-test results. The Initialization display lists the installation mode configuration for the terminal.• If the mode displayed is not strapped or is incorrectly strapped, a temporary setting may be used. In Menu 3, press M (misc. EEPROM parameters), then type 16 (channel card category) and configure the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to the correct mode. Reset the terminal and try the call again.SBB IMSI not registered • Call service providerDialing sequence was incomplete or incorrect Activate reports 21 and 52 • Verify the number you are calling and try the number again.• Make sure that you end the dialing sequence by pressing POUND KEY. Pressing POUND KEY at the end of the dialing string signals the system to send the call. Table 4-24  Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation (Continued)Fault Description Maintenance Report  Check
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-833 JUN 10Logon request fails Terminal is not transmitting Activate maintenance reports 21 and 23• Check for defective or loose cables.• Check for antenna line-of-sight interference.• Check for HPA fault.• Make sure that the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is secured properly to the ARINC connector in the tray.• Make sure that your account is current and active.Terminal is not receiving  Activate maintenance reports 21 and 23• Check for defective or loose cables.• Make sure that the antenna subsystem DLNA is powered.• Check for antenna line-of-sight interference.• Verify that the ICAO is valid, activated, and strapped correctly.• Make sure that your account is current and active.• Make sure that the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is secured properly to the ARINC connector in the tray.Incoming call failure Incoming call shows as a successful connection in report 23, but call does not ring through to the external device (telephone, computer, fax).Activate reports 21 and 23 • Check the connection between the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and the external device.• Check configuration of external devices is correct. MSN must be configured correctly for each device connected to the system.• If MSNs are not programmed in the user devices, incoming calls will ring all devices.NOTE: Zero is an invalid entry.  Table 4-24  Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation (Continued)Fault Description Maintenance Report  Check
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-843 JUN 10Logon successful, but fails to complete callAuthorization error (fault code 12C4) Activate reports 21 and 23 • Contact your service provider to verify that the ICAO, FWD ID, and IMSI are activated. • Check that the ICAO is strapped correctly.• Check that IRS data is available and correct.• Check that the Veh Rel Az/EL to Satellite is correct. • Check that all coaxial cable connections are secure.• Check that the Rx C/No value is greater than 50 dB/Hz.• Check that the antenna is functioning.• Check that the primary and secondary LES/GES access codes are valid. • Contact your service provider and verify that they can "see" your Tx signal. To contact the LES/GES operator, dial 33, POUND KEY.• Contact service provider and request that they place an incoming call to the terminal.• Check the reported HPA back-off in report 21. The S64 signal should initialize at 14 dBW and increase after handshake to approximately 22.5 dBW, then slowly decrease (typically to between 16.5 dBW and 21.5 dBW with a lower limit of 14.5 dBW). Table 4-24  Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation (Continued)Fault Description Maintenance Report  Check
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-853 JUN 10 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is operating outside the normal environmental specificationsChannel card temperature fault  Activate report 21 or 23 • Check channel card temperature; temperatures over 50° C may cause the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to shut down.• Check that the fan tray is operational.• Verify that the tray plug distribution is the same as presented in the installation requirements.Calls do not complete and connection is not establishedChannel Congestion (fault code 2024) Note: applies to Swift 64 only.Activate reports 21 and 23 • Wait five minutes and try the call again.• Contact the LES/GES to verify congestion. To contact the LES/GES operator, dial 33, POUND KEY.No call request sent  Activate report 52 • Verify that the call dial string is correct; pressing POUND KEY at the end of the dialing string signals the system to send the call.• Check that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is transmitting by ensuring the LED power indicator flashes on and off (1 Hz) during a call request.• Check that the ISDN, Ethernet, or POTS cable is connected correctly and securely.No dial tone heard in handsetActivate report 21 • Confirm that ISDN lines are wired correctly.• Verify that handset connection is secure.• Wait a few minutes for the system to warm up, then log on and try your call again.• Check that IRS data is available.• Verify that the terminal has completed beam registration. Table 4-24  Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation (Continued)Fault Description Maintenance Report  Check
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-863 JUN 10D. Fault Isolation and Diagnostic ProceduresThis section provides basic information required for technical personnel to isolate faults in  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals. Where needed, refer to other sections of this manual (which contain important information to aid in understanding the function of the terminal) for additional information.Fault isolation procedures are usually conducted on equipment that falls within one of the following categories: • Terminals that have failed to pass operational and installation verification procedures • Terminals that have failed during service • Terminals repaired and returned to serviceCAUTION: BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH FAULT ISOLATION PROCEDURES, REFER TO THE "SAFETY ADVISORIES" ON PAGE INTRO-6.(1) GeneralWhen performing fault isolation and diagnostic procedures, record and document all test results, including LED functions and maintenance port data outputs (reports 21 and 23).Enable reports 18, 19, and 20 (port), or items 6, 7, and 8 (starboard) to record antenna, ACU, and DLNA related faults. Enable other reports as required.(2) Saving a Diagnostic Reports FileMaintenance reports are helpful in troubleshooting the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. Capturing maintenance port information from the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and forwarding the file to Honeywell technical support staff will assist in troubleshooting suspected  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal problems.Call drops after successful connectionIf the RF signal fades significantly (during a call), the connection may drop.NOTE: A sudden, severe aircraft banking angle may obstruct the signal long enough (>15 sec.) to drop a call.Activate reports 21 and 23 • Check signal strength.  For Swift 64, C/No greater than or equal to 53.2 dB. • Make sure that there is a clear, unobstructed, line of sight to the satellite.• Select an alternate satellite or beam and try your call again.NOTE: This troubleshooting procedure works if you are located where more than one beam overlaps or satellite is in view. Table 4-24  Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation (Continued)Fault Description Maintenance Report  Check
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-873 JUN 10To save a diagnostics reports file: 1. Open a log file on the maintenance port, terminal program. (If you are using HyperTerminal, use the "Transfer, capture text" function.) 2. Power the system on or if applicable reset the system. 3. Enter maintenance mode on the maintenance port using maint as the password. 4. To activate reports 21 and 23 and toggle off all other reports, press EQUAL SIGN. 5. To save these reports as default, press S. This enables the user to view these reports on subsequent  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal power-ups or Reset entries.  6. Reset the system by cycling the power to the terminal; pressing the reset button on the  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal front panel; or, in Menu 2, pressing Z. NOTE: The  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal must be logged on to the Aero H+ service. 7. Log on to the maintenance port using the password: maintThe system restarts and ocean registration takes place (approximately two minutes). 8. To display Menu 2, press CTRL+N. 9. To display the software versions of the system, press V. 10.Make a call from the system or execute the procedure or sequence that causes the call failure. Make a note of the call progress. For example: Did you get a dial tone? Was the call successful? 11. If applicable, attempt calls from the remaining three channels. 12.To display the current reports profile of the system (as noted in step 4), press EQUAL SIGN.  13.To save an alternate reports configuration, activate the required items, and then, to save to EEPROM, press S in the reports menu. 14.To display the ORT List, press CTRL+N until Menu 3 appears, and then press O. (The ORT list displays one terminal screen of information at a time. To display the next screen, press O.) 15. To list the complete event log, in Menu 3: • press S (list event log) • press 0 (list complete log) • press PERIOD (list all remaining entries) 16.To list the complete call log, in Menu 3: • press F (list call log)  • press F again (list complete log)  • press PERIOD (list all remaining entries) • for extended information, press X 17.Close the log file on the terminal program.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 4-883 JUN 10 18.The log file is in text format (.txt file). Open the file and add notes to the beginning of the file indicating: • System serial number (from the label on the front of the terminal)  • Aircraft ID and customer name • Any notes about the problems encountered • Contact name, telephone number, and e-mail address • Any system anomalies or unique operating environments that may in any way affect the system’s function (e.g., physical location of aircraft or terminal, LES being used, list of connected devices) 19.Save the file with the date of the report in the file name. 20.E-mail the log file to Honeywell technical support.3. Adjustment/Alignment ProceduresThere are no adjustment/alignment procedures required for  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals.4. Modification HistoryThe  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal currently has no history of modifications.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 5-13 JUN 10MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRThis section provides maintenance and repair information for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, including the following sections: • Maintenance • Repair • Instructions for Continued Airworthiness1. MaintenanceThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal does not require routine maintenance.2. RepairAll repair procedures must be completed by Honeywell-approved repair facilities.A. Repair Tools and SuppliesNo special supplies are required to repair this equipment. HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals that require service must be returned to Honeywell or to an Honeywell-approved service center. Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-35 for terminal testing requirements and procedures.B. Repair ProceduresThis equipment does not require any special repair procedures.C. Battery ReplacementThe internal battery of the HSD-440 terminal cannot be replaced in the field. The unit must be returned to factory to have the internal battery replaced.D. Removal ProceduresIf an HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal must be removed from service for repair, remove power, disconnect all equipment from the terminal and then remove it from the ARINC tray.Remove the SCM from the terminal before returning the terminal for repair. You can insert the SCM into the repaired terminal before installing it in the aircraft.E. Repair Facility ApprovalsEMS Aviation, located at 400 Maple Grove Road in Ottawa, Ontario, Canada, is a Transport Canada Approved Maintenance Organization (AMO). In accordance with the Technical Arrangement on Maintenance between Canada and the European aviation authority JAA, and due to the Bilateral Agreement between Canada and the United States aviation authority FAA, EMS Aviation conforms to the maintenance requirements of JAR 145 and FAR 145 respectively.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 5-23 JUN 10F. Return for Repair InformationContact Honeywell International about return for repair instructions.3. Instructions for Continued AirworthinessThis section presents the instructions for continued airworthiness, as per FAR 25.1529, of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. Installation of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal on an aircraft by supplemental type certificate (STC) or Form 337 obligates the aircraft operator to include the maintenance information supplied by this manual in the operator's Aircraft Maintenance manual and the operator's Aircraft Scheduled Maintenance Program. The following paragraphs describe all maintenance requirements and instructions for continued airworthiness of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.  • Add the LRU part numbers and other necessary part numbers contained in this manual to the aircraft operator's appropriate, aircraft illustrated parts catalog (IPC). • Add all wiring diagram information contained in this manual to the aircraft operator's appropriate aircraft Wiring Diagram Manuals. • HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals are considered on-condition units. No additional or routine maintenance is required.  • If an HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is not operating, remove the terminal, secure cables and wiring, collar applicable switches and circuit breakers, and placard them as inoperative. Before flight, revise the equipment list and weight and balance data as applicable and record the removal of the terminal in the log book. Refer to section 91.213 of the FAR or the aircraft's minimum equipment list (MEL).  • HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals can not be repaired in the field. All terminals must be returned to the Honeywell factory or authorized repair centers for repair. • Repaired terminals must be re-installed on the aircraft in accordance with the instructions provided in this manual. The operation of all repaired terminals must be verified using the operational verification tests and procedures provided in this manual before being approved for return to service. All special tools required to test the terminal for approval for return to service are listed and described in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-35. Approval for return to service must be entered in the logbook as required by section 43.9 of the FAR. • The following scheduled maintenance tasks must be added to the aircraft operator's appropriate aircraft maintenance program: • Recommended periodic scheduled servicing tasks: None required. • Recommended periodic inspections: None required. • Recommended periodic scheduled preventative maintenance tests (tests to determine system condition and/or latent failures): None required.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-13 JUN 10CONFIGURING THE OWNERS REQUIREMENTS TABLE (ORT)There are two methods of configuring ORT parameters: • Configuring ORT Parameters Using the MPU • Configuring ORT Parameters Using the EMS ORT ApplicationWhen your computer is connected to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal through the serial maintenance connection, you can set ORT parameters one at a time.Using the EMS ORT Application, you can edit various ORT parameters in one session, save and export an ORT file, and then load the file into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.1. Configuring ORT Parameters Using the MPUFor information on creating ORTs using the MPU , see "Creating ORTs with the Maintenance Port Utility (MPU)" on page 2-4.This section lists the parameters you can configure in both the secure partition and the user partition of the ORT. See the individual procedure for more information.You can use the MPU to configure the secure parameters described in Table 6-1:  Table 6-1  Configuring Secure ORT Parameters Category SectionORT Part Number Configuring the ORT Part Number (secure)Cockpit Communications Configuring the Call Signaling ModeConfiguring Outgoing Call SignalingConfiguring Ground Public Routing4-wire Configuring 4-wire WiringConfiguring Ground-to-Cockpit Call RoutingConfiguring 4-wire ParametersPOTS Configuring POTS ParametersCEPT-E1 Configuring CEPT-E1 InterfaceConfiguring the CEPT-E1 Interface TypeHigh Speed Data Services Configuring the Default PPPoE ServiceConfiguring SCPC High Speed ServiceConfiguring MPDS High Speed ServiceConfiguring SBB High Speed ServiceEthernet Configuring Ethernet WiringConfiguring Ethernet Duplex ModeConfiguring the Ethernet Port AddressConfiguring the Ethernet Mask
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-23 JUN 10Networking Parameters for Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2 Configuring the Host NameConfiguring the Access Concentrator NameConfiguring the SNMP ServerConfiguring the SNMP Community StringConfiguring the TFTP ServerConfiguring the DHCP ClientConfiguring the DHCP ServerConfiguring Telnet AccessConfiguring the Managed RangeConfiguring the Number of Managed AddressesConfiguring the Access Point NameAvionics Configuring the Primary Inertial Reference System (IRS)Configuring the Secondary IRSConfiguring the Secondary IRS Input SpeedConfiguring GNSS EquipmentConfiguring the ICAO Code SourceSatellite Service Configuring the Forward IDConfiguring Satellite InformationConfiguring GES Service Provider InformationConfiguring the Frequency TableConfiguring LES Service Provider InformationConfiguring the SwiftBroadband Timing ModeConfiguring the Priority Service for Channel Card OneConfiguring the Service Type PriorityAntenna Configuring the Antenna TypeConfiguring the Antenna Mounting Rotation AngleConfiguring the Antenna Mounting Pitch AngleConfiguring the Antenna Mounting Roll AngleConfiguring the HPA to Antenna LossConfiguring the Diplexer Table 6-1  Configuring Secure ORT Parameters (Continued)Category Section
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-33 JUN 10You can use the MPU to configure the user parameters described in Table 6-2: MCDU Configuring MCDU WiringConfiguring the MCDU Input SpeedConfiguring the MCDU Output SpeedConfiguring the MCDU Controller TypeConfiguring the MCDU TypeConfiguring the MCDU Font ColourConfiguring Manual DialingConfiguring Outgoing Call Pre-SelectionConfiguring the Address Book CategoriesCMU Configuring CMU WiringConfiguring the CMU Input SpeedConfiguring the CMU Output SpeedConfiguring the CMU-SDU Join/Leave WordConfiguring Hardcoded SALTerminal Operation Configuring Air/Ground Status RestrictionsConfiguring Transmit on GroundConfiguring Self-test in AirConfiguring Maintenance Command Execution in AirConfiguring MCDU PASTConfiguring Field Loadable SoftwareConfiguring the Logon/Handover PolicyConfiguring Logon InterrogationConfiguring High-rate R/T in Global BeamMasking Position in LogsConfiguring HSD SALPassive Intermodulation (PIM) Configuring PIMBIT HGA Azimuth Offset AngleConfiguring PIMBIT IGA Azimuth Offset AngleConfiguring PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angle1Configuring PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angle2Configuring PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle1Configuring PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle2Configuring PIMBIT Measurement Discard RatioConfiguring PIMBIT Failure ThresholdConfiguring PIMBIT Pointing Failure Threshold Table 6-1  Configuring Secure ORT Parameters (Continued)Category Section
 Table 6-2  User ORT Parameters Category User ORT ParameterUser Parameters Configuring the ORT Part Number (user)Configuring the Service Type PriorityConfiguring the Logon/Handover PolicyConfiguring Logon InterrogationConfiguring High-rate R/T in Global BeamMasking Position in LogsSYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-43 JUN 10A. Connecting to the MPUYou can configure ORT parameters manually or using the EMS ORT Application through the HSD-440 terminal MPU.To connect to the MPU: 1. Connect your computer to the maintenance port of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal with a maintenance cable. 2. Start a terminal emulator session with the following parameters: • Baud rate—19200 • No. of bits—8 • Parity—None • Stop bits—1 • Flow control—None 3. When the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal boots, type the password maint.NOTE: The password does not appear on the screen.NOTE: You can configure secure and user ORT parameters using maintenance-level access. The user-level access password, user, allows you to see all the ORT parameters but you can only configure the user-level parameters.Menu 1 of the MPU appears. You can navigate the menus to configure ORT parameters. 4. To navigate to Menu 3, press CTRL + N. 5. In Menu 3, type the number next to set CP ORT parameter, and then press ENTER.A list of ORT parameters appears.B. Configuring the ORT Part NumberYou can configure a part number for the secure and user ORT. The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal displays the part number when it boots up.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-53 JUN 10When you configure the parameter for the part number, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal calculates a CRC value for the overall ORT. The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses the CRC value to indicate when the ORT has changed.To configure the secure ORT part number or the user ORT part number: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SECURE ORT P/N parameter, or the USER ORT P/N parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. At the SECURE ORT P/N or the USER ORT P/N prompt, type in the part number, and then press ENTER.You can type up to 20 characters. The default is blank.C. Configuring Cockpit Communication Parameters(1) Configuring the Call Signaling ModeThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can announce an incoming call in the aircraft cabin with a chime and light of ARINC 741—the default setting, or with the CD1/CD2 discretes. The call signaling parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure the call signaling mode: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the COCKPIT CALL SIGNALING MODE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To use chime and light signaling, type 0, or to use CD1/CD2 discrete signaling, type 1, and then press ENTER.The default is CHIME/LIGHT.(2) Configuring Outgoing Call SignalingThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can signal an outgoing call with a chime and a flashing light. The outgoing call signaling parameter enables and disables these signals. This parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure outgoing call signaling: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the COCKPIT OUTGOING CALL SIGNALING parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To announce outgoing air to ground calls with a chime and light, type 1, or to disable the chime and light, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is DISABLED. (3) Configuring Ground Public RoutingThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can route public calls from the ground to the cockpit, to the CEPT-E1 interface, or not route the call (disallowed). The ground public routing preference parameter is in the secure ORT.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-63 JUN 10To configure ground public routing preferences: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the GROUND PUBLIC ROUTING PREFERENCE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To disallow all incoming public calls, type 1, or to route public calls to the cockpit, type 2, or to route public calls to the CEPT-E1, type 3, and then press ENTER.The default is DISALLOWED.D. Configuring 4-wire Parameters(1) Configuring 4-wire WiringThe 4-wire #2 wired ORT parameter defines whether the second 4-wire equipment is installed. The 4-wire #2 wired parameter is in the secure ORT.NOTE: If the '4-WIRE #2 WIRED' ORT parameter is set to NO then the GROUND TO COCKPIT ROUTING PREF parameter is automatically set to 4-WIRE #1.To configure 4-wire #2 wiring: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the 4-Wire #2 Wired parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To set the preference to NO, type 0, or to set the preference to YES, type 1, and then press ENTER.The default is NO.(2) Configuring Ground-to-Cockpit Call RoutingThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can route calls from the ground to the cockpit through either of the two supported 4-wire phones. The call routing parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure ground-to-cockpit call routing: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the GROUND TO COCKPIT CALL ROUTING PREF parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To route the calls to 4-WIRE #1, type 1, or to route the calls to 4-WIRE #2 (if wired) type 2, and then press ENTER.The default is 4-WIRE #1.(3) Configuring 4-wire ParametersYou can configure the noise, speaker, microphone, and sidetone level settings of the 4-wire phones. These 4-wire parameters are in the user ORT.NOTE: To configure the 4-wire #2 parameters, repeat the following four procedures.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-73 JUN 10To configure the 4-wire noise level: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the 4-WIRE #1 NOISE LEVEL parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. At the prompt, define the default setting for the 4-wire #1 comfort noise insertion level by typing one of the following values: 0, -40, -50, or -60, and then press ENTER.The default level is -50.To configure the 4-wire speaker level: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the 4-WIRE #1 SPEAKER LEVEL parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. At the prompt, define the 4-wire #1 speaker volume, by typing a value between 0 and 100, and then press ENTER.The default level is 50, which equals a 2.5 mW output.To configure the 4-wire microphone level: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the 4-WIRE #1 MIC LEVEL parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. At the prompt, type in a value between 1 and 100, and then press ENTER.The default level is 70.To configure the 4-wire sidetone level: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the 4-WIRE #1 SIDETONE LEVEL parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. At the prompt, define the default setting for the 4-wire #1 sidetone level by typing a value between 1 and 100, and then press ENTER.The default level is 50.E. Configuring POTS Parameters(1) Configuring POTSYou can enable and disable POTS with the POTS service parameter. The POTS service parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure POTS: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the POTS SERVICE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To enable POTS, type 1, or to disable POTS, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is ENABLED.F. Configuring CEPT-E1 ParametersYou can enable the CEPT-E1 interface with the MPU.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-83 JUN 10(1) Configuring CEPT-E1 InterfaceThe CEPT-E1 wiring parameter indicates whether the CEPT-E1 interface is wired. The CEPT-E1 wiring parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure CEPT-E1 wiring: 1. In the list of ORT interface parameters, type the number next to the CEPT E1 WIRED parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To indicate the CEPT-E1 interface is wired, type 1, or to indicate the CEPT-E1 interface is not wired, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is YES.(2) Configuring the CEPT-E1 Interface TypeThe CEPT-E1 interface can connect to a variety of equipment. The available options are: • Not installed •ARINC 746 •ITUThe CEPT-E1 interface type parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure the CEPT-E1 interface type: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the CEPT E1 INTERFACE TYPE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To indicate that the CEPT-E1 interface type is not installed, type 0, or to indicate the CEPT-E1 interface type is ARINC 746, type 1, or to indicate the CEPT-E1 interface type is ITU, type 2, and then press ENTER.The default is ARINC 746.G. Configuring High Speed Data Services(1) Configuring the Default PPPoE ServiceThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can use a default PPPoE service name if the client does not provide the service name. The default PPPoE service parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure the default PPPoE service: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the DEFAULT PPPOE SERVICE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. Type a default service name, up to 60-characters in length, and then press ENTER.The default PPPoE service name is PacketData.(2) Configuring SCPC High Speed ServiceThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can provide access to Swift 64 SCPC service through Ethernet. The parameter to allow SCPC sessions is in the secure ORT.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-93 JUN 10To configure SCPC high speed service: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ALLOW SCPC SESSIONS parameter, and then press ENTER.  2. To enable SCPC services, type 1, or to disable SCPC services, type 0, and then press ENTER. The default is YES.(3) Configuring MPDS High Speed ServiceThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can provide access to Swift 64 MPDS service through Ethernet. The parameter to allow MPDS sessions is in the secure ORT.To configure MPDS high speed service: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ALLOW MPDS SESSIONS parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To enable MPDS high speed service, type 1, or to disable MPDS high speed service, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is YES.(4) Configuring SBB High Speed ServiceThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can provide access to SBB service through Ethernet. The parameter to allow SBB sessions is in the secure ORT.To configure SBB high speed service: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ALLOW BGAN SESSIONS parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To enable SBB high speed service, type 1, or to disable SBB high speed service, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is YES.H. Configuring Ethernet Parameters(1) Configuring Ethernet WiringThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses the parameters for Ethernet #1 and #2 wiring in conjunction with the Ethernet link status to determine whether to raise and transmit Ethernet faults to the CMU. If the Ethernet wiring parameters are set to NO, the parameters for the Ethernet address and Ethernet mask have no effect.The Ethernet wiring parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure Ethernet wiring: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ETHERNET #1 WIRED parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To specify that a device is wired to the Ethernet #1 port, type 1, or to specify that no device is wired to the Ethernet #1 port, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is YES, wired. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to configure the ETHERNET #2 WIRED parameter.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-103 JUN 10(2) Configuring Ethernet Duplex ModeYou can define the duplex mode for the Ethernet ports. The available options are: • ETH1=HALF Duplex, ETH2=HALF Duplex • ETH1=FULL Duplex, ETH2=HALF Duplex • ETH1=HALF Duplex, ETH2=FULL Duplex • ETH1=FULL Duplex, ETH2=FULL DuplexThe parameter for the Ethernet duplex mode is in the secure ORT.To configure Ethernet duplex mode: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ETHERNET DUPLEX MODE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. At the prompt, type 0, 1, 2, or 3, and then press ENTER, where: • 0—half duplex for both ports • 1—full duplex mode for Ethernet 1 only • 2—full duplex mode for Ethernet 2 only • 3—full duplex mode for both Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2The default is 0.A message similar to the following appears:PROCEEDING TO STORE DATA(3) Configuring the Ethernet Port AddressYou can configure the base IP address for each of the two Ethernet ports. The parameters that define the Ethernet port addresses are in the secure ORT.To configure the Ethernet port addresses: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ETHERNET 1 ADDRESS parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. Type an IP address using decimals ranging from 0-255, in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, and then press ENTER.The default address for Ethernet 1 is 192.168.0.1. The default address for Ethernet 2 is 0.0.0.0.(4) Configuring the Ethernet MaskYou can configure the network mask for each of the two Ethernet ports. The parameters that define the Ethernet port network masks are in the secure ORT.To configure the Ethernet port masks: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ETHERNET 1 MASK parameter. 2. Type an IP address using decimals ranging from 0-255, in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, and then press ENTER.The default subnet mask for both Ethernet ports is 255.255.255.0.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-113 JUN 10I. Configuring Networking Parameters For Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2(1) Configuring the Host NameYou can configure the host name for the HSD-440 terminal with a string of up to 20 characters. The parameter for the host name is in the secure ORT.To configure the host name: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the HOST NAME parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. At the prompt, type the host name for the HSD-440 terminal using a maximum of up to 20 characters, and then press ENTER.The default is DataIO.(2) Configuring the Access Concentrator NameThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses the access concentrator name parameter to differentiate between PPPoE devices. The access concentrator name can include up to 20 characters. The access concentrator name parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure the access concentrator name: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ACCESS CONCENTRATOR NAME parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. At the prompt, type a name of up to 20 characters, and then press ENTER.A message indicating that the DATA I/O parameter block is updated appears.The default is DataIO.(3) Configuring the SNMP ServerThe SNMP server parameter enables and disables the SNMP server. This parameter is in the secure ORT.To enable the SNMP server: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SNMP SERVER parameter, and the press ENTER. 2. At the prompt, type the number next to the enabled or disabled option, and then press ENTER.The default is ENABLED.(4) Configuring the SNMP Community StringYou can define an SNMP community string with up to 32 characters. This parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure the SNMP community string: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SNMP COMMUNITY STRING parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. At the prompt, type a name up to 32 characters in length, and then press ENTER.The default is PUBLIC.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-123 JUN 10(5) Configuring the TFTP ServerYou can enable and disable the TFTP server. The TFTP server parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure the TFTP server: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the TFTP SERVER parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To enable the TFTP server, at the prompt, type yes, or to disable the TFTP server, type no, and then press ENTER.The default is ENABLED.(6) Configuring the DHCP ClientYou can enable and disable the DHCP client on Ethernet port one. The DHCP client parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure the DHCP client: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ENABLE DHCP CLIENT parameter, and then press ENTER.  2. To enable the DHCP client, at the prompt, type yes, or to disable the DHCP client, type no, and then press ENTER.The default is DISABLED.(7) Configuring the DHCP ServerYou can enable and disable the DHCP server on Ethernet port one. The DHCP server parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure the DHCP server: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ENABLE DHCP SERVER parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To enable the DHCP server, at the prompt, type yes, or to disable the DHCP server, type no, and then press ENTER.The default is DISABLED.(8) Configuring Telnet AccessYou can enable and disable the Telnet server. The Telnet server parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure Telnet access: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the TELNET ACCESS parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To enable the Telnet server, at the prompt, type yes, or to disable the Telnet server, type no, and then press ENTER.The default is ENABLED.(9) Configuring the Managed RangeYou can configure the starting IP address provided to DHCP clients if the DHCP server is enabled. The managed range parameter is in the secure ORT.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-133 JUN 10To configure the managed range: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the START OF MANAGED RANGE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. At the prompt, type the starting address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, and then press ENTER.The default is 192.168.0.100. (10)Configuring the Number of Managed AddressesYou can configure the number of managed addresses provided to DHCP clients if the DHCP server is enabled. The parameter for the number of managed addresses is in the secure ORT. 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the NUMBER OF MANAGED ADDRESSES parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. At the prompt, type a value between 1 and 100, and then press ENTER.The default value is 50. (11)Configuring the Access Point NameWhen configuring SBB services, you can configure the access point name in the secure ORT. 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ACCESS POINT NAME parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. At the prompt, type a name, and the press ENTER. An example name is stratos.bgan.inmarsat.com.The default value is null.J. Configuring Avionics Parameters(1) Configuring the Primary Inertial Reference System (IRS)You can configure the type of equipment that provides input to the primary IRS (IRS #1). The available options are: • Inertial—default •GNSS •HybridThe primary IRS parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure the primary IRS type: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PRIMARY IRS TYPE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. At the prompt, type 0, 1, or 2, and then press ENTER, where: • 0—INERTIAL (default) • 1—GNSS • 2—HYBRID
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-143 JUN 10(2) Configuring the Secondary IRSYou can configure the type of equipment that provides input to the secondary IRS (IRS #2). The available options are: • Not installed—default •Inertial • AES ID •GNSS • HybridThe secondary IRS parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure the secondary IRS type: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SECONDARY IRS TYPE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. At the prompt, type 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4, and then press ENTER, where: • 0—NOT INSTALLED (default) • 1—INERTIAL • 2—AES ID •3—GNSS • 4—HYBRIDThe default is Not Installed.(3) Configuring the Secondary IRS Input SpeedYou can set the receive data rate for the secondary IRS ARINC 429 bus. This parameter is in the secure ORT.To set the secondary IRS input speed: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SECONDARY IRS INPUT SPEED SELECT parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To set the IRS ARINC 429 bus data receive speed rate to high rate, type 1, or to set the bus speed to low rate, type 0, and then press ENTER. The default speed is high rate.(4) Configuring GNSS EquipmentYou can enable and disable the GPS protection algorithm depending on the GPS/GLONASS equipment installed in the aircraft. The available options are: •None • GPS—default • GPS Augmented by GLONASSThe parameter for GNSS equipment is in the secure ORT.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-153 JUN 10To configure GNSS equipment: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the A/C GNSS EQUIPMENT parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. At the prompt, type 0, 1, or 2, and then press ENTER, where: • 0—disables GPS protection on an aircraft that does not have GPS augmented by GLONASS navigation equipment installed • 1—enables GPS protection on an aircraft that has GPS navigation equipment installed • 2—enables GPS protection on an aircraft that has GPS augmented by GLONASS navigation equipment installedThe default is GPS.(5) Configuring the ICAO Code SourceYou can provide the ICAO code by strapping or from the ARINC 429 source. You can use the ARINC 429 source only if the Secondary IRS Type parameter is set to AES ID.The ICAO code source parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure the ICAO code source: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ICAO CODE SOURCE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To configure A429 SOURCE as the source, type 1, or to configure STRAP inertial as the source, type 0, and then press ENTER. The default is STRAP.K. Configuring Satellite Service ORT Parameters(1) Configuring the Forward IDYou can configure the six-digit hexadecimal Forward ID required for Swift 64 services. The Forward ID is in the secure ORT.To configure the Forward ID: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the FORWARD ID parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To define the forward ID, type the forward ID, then press ENTER. The default forward ID is 000000—this forward ID does not allow access to the satellite network.NOTE: Power cycle the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to activate the new Forward ID.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-163 JUN 10(2) Configuring Satellite InformationYou can configure the name, location, and service available from up to eight satellites. This does not allow access to the satellite network. Satellite information is in the secure ORT. The default settings are:Entry # Region Satellite Name and Longitude  Services 1 0 AORW (W) 53.0W CLASSIC AERO, SWIFT642 1 AORE (E) 15.5W CLASSIC AERO, SWIFT643 2 POR (P), 178.0E CLASSIC AERO, SWIFT644 3 IOR (I) 64.0E CLASSIC AERO, SWIFT645 4 MTSAT (4) 142.5E CLASSIC AERO6 5 APAC (5), 144 E CLASSIC AERO, BGAN7 6 EMEA (6), 25.0E CLASSIC AERO, BGAN8 7 AMERICAS (7) 98.0 W CLASSIC AERO, BGANTo configure satellite information: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SATELLITE NAMES parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. Type the number of the ENTRY you want to modify, and then press ENTER.A prompt appears. For example: EDITING ENTRY #1 REGION 0: NAME [AORW] ?  3. At the NAME prompt, type the satellite name and then press ENTER. 4. At the ABBREVIATION prompt, type an abbreviation for the satellite name and then press ENTER. 5. At the LONGITUDE prompt, type the longitude and then press ENTER. 6. At the SATELLITE SERVICES prompt, identify the service and then press ENTER. You can specify one or more of the following:•Type A for AERO• Type S for SWIFT64•Type B for SBBNOTE: To specify more than one service, for example, classic AERO and Swift 64, type AS. 7. At the SAVE ENTRY prompt, to save the changes, type Y, or to cancel, type N.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-173 JUN 10(3) Configuring GES Service Provider InformationYou can configure the GES Name, satellite ID, GES ID, and priority for up to 33 GESs. GES information is in the secure ORT. Note the GES ID in the following table is an Octal number. The default settings are:GES Name Satellite ID GES ID PriorityAussaguel 005 5Eik 002 5Aussaguel 1103 5Eik 1104 5Perth 2205 5Santa Paula 2202 5Perth 3305 5Eik 3301 5Hawaii 5120 5Fucino 6220 5Hawaii 7320 5To configure GES service provider information: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the GES SERVICE PROVIDER TABLE parameter, and then press ENTER.A prompt appears. For example:  OTHER ENTRIES ARE EMPTY -- ENTER NUMBER OF ENTRY TO  EDIT (1,33) ?  2. At the ENTRY prompt, type the entry number to add or edit and then press ENTER. 3. At the SATELLITE prompt, type the number of the satellite ID and then press ENTER. 4. At the GES [octal]? prompt, type the number (in Octal) of the GES ID and then press ENTER. 5. At the PRIORITY prompt, type a number between 1 and 10 and then press ENTER. 6. At the GES NAME prompt, type in the GES name and then press ENTER. 7. At the SAVE ENTRY prompt, to save the changes, type Y, or to cancel, type N.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-183 JUN 10(4) Configuring the Frequency TableThe Frequency Table defines the Global Band (SBB) and PSID (Areo H/H+) frequencies for up to eight satellites. You can configure two or more frequency pairs and NCS (S64) for each service type. The Frequency Table is in the secure ORT. The default settings are:Entry # Region Service Type Frequencies  Frequencies 1 0 AERO PSID FREQS: $3702, $36B8 NCS FREQS: $2AAC,$30E02 1 AERO PSID0 FREQS: $36FE, $36B6 NCS FREQS: $2AB0,$30E43 2 AERO PSID FREQS: $36B4, $37004 3 AERO PSID FREQS: $36B2, $36FC5 4 AERO PSID FREQS: $38F7, $38F76 5 Global Beam FREQS: $2AF2, $302A AERO PSID FREQS: $36DA, $36DA7 6 Global Beam FREQS: $2BA0, $309E AERO PSID FREQS: $36DE, $36DE8 7 Global Beam FREQS:$2A4C, $3004  AERO PSID FREQS: $36DC,$36DCTo configure the Frequency Table: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the FREQUENCY TABLE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. Type the ENTRY number you want to edit and then press ENTER. 3. At the SBB GLOBAL BEAM FREQS prompt, type the frequency pair and then press ENTER. 4. At the AERO PSID FREQS prompt, type the frequency pair and then press ENTER. 5. At the SWIFT64 NCS FREQS prompt, type the frequency pair and then press ENTER. 6. At the SAVE ENTRY prompt, to save the changes, type Y, or to cancel, type N.NOTE: You must enter a minimum of two frequency pairs per service type for each satellite up to a maximum of eight satellites. Frequency pairs are hexadecimal, with values separated by a comma, for example,  $3702, $36B8.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-193 JUN 10(5) Configuring LES Service Provider InformationThe LES Service Provider Table can hold LES parameters for up to eight satellites. The LES parameters are the satellite name and LES ID. The LES service provider information is in the secure ORT. The default settings are:Entry # Satellite LES ID 1 AORW LES 02AORE LES 03POR LES 04IOR LES 05MTSAT LES 06APAC LES 07EMEA LES 08AMERICAS LES 0To configure LES service provider information: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the LES SERVICE PROVIDER TABLE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. Type the ENTRY number you want to edit and then press ENTER. 3. At the LES prompt, type the LES number and then press ENTER. 4. At the NETWORK ID prompt, type the network ID and then press ENTER. 5. At the LES NAME prompt, type the LES name and then press ENTER. 6. At the SAVE ENTRY prompt, to save the changes, type Y, or to cancel, type N.(6) Configuring the SwiftBroadband Timing ModeThe SBB timing mode determines the timing precision used by the Radio Access Network. The timing modes are: GPS Assisted, Not Assisted, and Auto Determination. The default setting is Not Assisted. The SBB timing mode is in the secure ORT.To configure the SBB timing mode: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SWIFTBROADBAND TIMING MODE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. At the prompt, type 0, 1, or 2, and then press ENTER, where: • 0—Not Assisted—default • 1—GPS Assisted • 2—Auto DeterminationThe auto determination state uses a lookup of the primary IRS type and secondary IRS type ORT parameters. If either specifies GNSS, or HYBRID type labels, the SwiftBroadband timing mode is GPS assisted. If GNSS, or HYBRID
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-203 JUN 10is not specified, is not assisted. If the timing mode is not assisted, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is set as Aeronautical Class without GPS BGAN terminal.(7) Configuring the Priority Service for Channel Card OneChannel card one can access SBB and Swift 64 services. You can assign the priority service with the following options: • SWIFT64 ONLY • SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6 REVERTING TO SWIFT64—default • SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6 ONLY • SWIFT64 REVERTING TO SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6The priority service is in the secure ORT.To configure the priority service for channel card one: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the CARD #1 SBB/S64 PRIORITY parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. At the prompt, type 0, 1, 2, or 3 and then press ENTER, where: • 0—SWIFT64 only on CC1 • 1—SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6 REVERTING TO SWIFT64 • 2—SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6 ONLY • 3—SWIFT64 REVERTING TO SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6The default priority service is SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6 REVERTING TO SWIFT64.(8) Configuring the Service Type PriorityThe service type priority parameter defines which service gets second priority for power when the requirements for priority three and above Aero H calls are satisfied. The service type priority parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure the service type priority: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SERVICE TYPE PRIORITY parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To configure PUBLIC CORRESPONDENCE, type 0, or to configure SBB/S64, type 1, and then press ENTER.The default is PUBLIC CORRESPONDENCE.L. Configuring Antenna ORT Parameters(1) Configuring the Antenna TypeThe antenna type parameter defines the type of antenna installed on the aircraft. The available options are: • ARINC 781 HGA • ARINC 781 IGA • ARINC 741 HGA, Top Mount—default
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-213 JUN 10 • ARINC 741 HGA, Side MountIf a third MCDU is installed, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal cannot use the side-mount antenna.The antenna type parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure the antenna type: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ANTENNA TYPE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. At the prompt, type 2, 4, or 5 and then press ENTER, where: • 2—ARINC 781 HGA • 4—ARINC 741 HGA, TOP MOUNT • 5—ARINC 741 HGA, SIDE MOUNTThe default is set to ARINC 741 HGA, TOP MOUNT.(2) Configuring the Antenna Mounting Rotation AngleThe antenna mounting rotation angle defines the difference between the fore-aft axis of the antenna reference plane and the fore-aft axis of the aircraft. The rotation is measured counter-clockwise from the aircraft forward axis toward the antenna forward axis (or the port side).The antenna mounting rotation angle parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure the antenna mounting rotation angle: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ANTENNA MOUNTING ROTATION ANGLE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. Type a value between 0 and 360, to one decimal place, and then press ENTER.The default is 0.0.(3) Configuring the Antenna Mounting Pitch AngleThe antenna mounting pitch angle defines the difference between the fore-aft axis of the antenna reference plane and the fore-aft axis of the aircraft. The pitch is measured in the nose-up direction from the aircraft forward axis toward the antenna forward axis.The antenna mounting pitch angle parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure the antenna mounting pitch angle: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ANTENNA MOUNTING PITCH ANGLE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. Type a value between 0 and 360, to one decimal place, and then press ENTER.The default is 0.0.(4) Configuring the Antenna Mounting Roll AngleThe antenna mounting roll angle defines the difference between the port-starboard axis of the antenna reference plane and the port-starboard axis of the aircraft. The roll is measured in the starboard-up direction from the aircraft starboard axis toward the antenna starboard axis.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-223 JUN 10The antenna mounting roll angle parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure the antenna mounting roll angle: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ANTENNA MOUNTING ROLL ANGLE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. Type a value between 0 and 360, to one decimal place, and then press ENTER.The default is 0.0.(5) Configuring the HPA to Antenna LossThe HPA to antenna loss parameter defines the total loss (in dB) from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to the antenna input port, including the DLNA and DLNA to antenna cable losses. The HPA to antenna loss parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure the HPA to antenna loss: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the HSD (HPA)- ANTENNA LOSS parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. Type a value between 0 and 5.0, to one decimal place, and then press ENTER. The default is 2.5.(6) Configuring the DiplexerYou can configure the type of diplexer installed in the aircraft. The available options are: •Type A • Type A Modified •Type D • Type F—defaultType F diplexers support SBB service.The diplexer parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure the diplexer: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the INSTALLED DIPLEXER TYPE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. At the prompt, type 0, 1, 2, or 3 and then press ENTER, where: • 0—diplexer TYPE A • 1—diplexer TYPE A MODIFIED • 2—diplexer TYPE D • 3—diplexer TYPE FThe default is TYPE A.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-233 JUN 10M. Configuring MCDU ORT Parameters(1) Configuring MCDU WiringThe MCDU wiring parameter defines whether the MCDU can be wired or not wired. There is a parameter for each of the  devices. The MCDU wired parameters are in the secure partition of the ORT.To configure the MCDU interface on the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MCDU/WSCI #x WIRED parameter, and then press ENTER.The prompt: MCDU/WSCI #x WIRED where x equals 1 appears. 2. To indicate that the MCDU #1  device is wired, type 1, or to indicate that it is not wired, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default for the MCDU/WSCI #1  WIRED parameter is Yes.(2) Configuring the MCDU Input SpeedYou can configure the input bus speed to high or low. The input speed parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure MCDU input speed: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MCDU/WSCI INPUT SPEED parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To set the input bus data speed to high rate, type 1, or to set the bus speed to low rate, type 0, and then press ENTER. The default speed is low rate.(3) Configuring the MCDU Output SpeedYou can configure the output bus speed to high or low. The output speed parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure MCDU output speed: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MCDU/WSCI OUTPUT SPEED parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To set the output bus speed to high rate, type 1, or to set the output bus speed to low, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default output speed is set to high rate.(4) Configuring the MCDU Controller TypeYou can select the type of controller installed on the aircraft. The controller type parameter is in the secure ORT.To configure the MCDU controller type: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MCDU/WSCI CONTROLLER TYPE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To select the controller type MCDU, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is MCDU.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-243 JUN 10(5) Configuring the MCDU TypeYou can select the type of MCDU installed in the aircraft. The MCDU type parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.To configure the MCDU type: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MCDU TYPE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. At the prompt, type 1, 2, 3, or 6 and then press ENTER, where: • 1—UNILINK •2—SMITHS • 3—HONEYWELL • 6—BOEING TECHSAT SIMThe default is UNILINK.(6) Configuring the MCDU Font ColourYou can change the color of text on the MCDU screen. The MCDU font colour parameter enables the MCDU to display colours other than white. The MCDU FONT COLOUR is in the secure partition of the ORT.To configure the MCDU font colour: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MCDU FONT COLOUR parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To enable the MCDU font colour, type 1, or to disable the MCDU font colour, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is DISABLED.(7) Configuring Manual DialingYou can manually dial numbers using the MCDU keyboard. The manual dialing can be enabled or disabled. The ALLOW MANUAL DIAL parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.To configure manual dialing: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ALLOW MANUAL DIAL parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To enable manual dialing, type 1, or to disable manual dialing, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is ENABLED.(8) Configuring Outgoing Call Pre-SelectionThe COCKPIT OUTGOING CALL PRE-SELECT parameter enables users to pre-select air-to-ground calls and then dial the number using the Mic-On input or MAKE CALL button on the MCDU. When this parameter is disabled, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal dials air-to-ground calls immediately.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-253 JUN 10To configure outgoing call pre-selection: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the COCKPIT OUTGOING CALL PRE-SELECT parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To enable pre-selection, type 1, or to disable pre-selection, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is DISABLED.(9) Configuring the Address Book CategoriesThe address book defines a table that can hold up to 400 telephone numbers in 4 categories of up to 100 entries. Each entry includes: • A phone number (maximum of 18 digits). • A name (maximum of 14 alphanumeric characters). • A priority for the phone number. The priority can be EMG, OP-HI, OP-LO, and NON-OP, which correspond to priority (Q) numbers 15, 12, 10, and 9. • A parameter to indicate whether the entry can be edited via the MCDU. • A parameter to indicate the phone book category to which the entry belongs.You can define up to four phone book categories in the MCDU address book. The category name can be up to ten characters in length. The category name parameters are in the secure partition of the ORT.NOTE: If the ORT entry is empty, CATEGORY #x appears, where x is the number of the phone book category, between 1 and 4.To configure the address book categories: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PHONEBOOK CAT NAME 1 parameter. 2. Type the category name and then press ENTER. 3. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PHONEBOOK CAT NAME 2 parameter. 4. Type the category name and then press ENTER. 5. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PHONEBOOK CAT NAME 3 parameter. 6. Type the category name and then press ENTER. 7. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PHONEBOOK CAT NAME 4 parameter.N. Configuring the CMU(1) Configuring CMU WiringYou can configure if either of the two available CMUs is wired. The CMU #x WIRED parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-263 JUN 10To configure the CMU wiring: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the CMU #x WIRED parameter, and then press ENTER. The prompt: CMU #x WIRED? where x equals 1 or 2 appears. 2. To indicate that the CMU #1 or CMU #2 can be wired, type 1, or to indicate that the CMU #1 or CMU #2 cannot be wired, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default for the CMU #1 WIRED parameter is YES (wired) and for the CMU #2 WIRED parameter is NO (not wired). (2) Configuring the CMU Input SpeedYou can configure the input bus speed to high rate or low rate. The input speed parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.To configure CMU input speed: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the CMU INPUT SPEED SELECT parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To set the CMU input bus speed to a high rate, type 1, or to set the CMU input bus speed to a low rate, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is low rate.(3) Configuring the CMU Output SpeedYou can configure the output bus speed to high rate or low rate. The output speed parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.To configure CMU output speed: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the CMU OUTPUT SPEED SELECT parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To set the CMU output bus speed to a high rate, type 1, or to set the CMU output bus speed to a low rate, type 0, and then press ENTER. The default is low rate.(4) Configuring the CMU-SDU Join/Leave WordThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can send join/leave words periodically or only on logon and logoff events. The CMU-SDU join/leave word parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.NOTE: This parameter supports Universal brand CMU that reports a SAL that is different than the one it accepts when using a Williamsburg protocol.To configure the CMU-SDU join/leave word: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the CMU-SDU JOIN/LEAVE WORD TRANSMISSION parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To transmit join/leave words periodically, type 1, or to transmit join/leave words on events, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is PERIODIC.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-273 JUN 10(5) Configuring Hardcoded SALThe CMU-SDU hardcoded SAL parameter determines the SAL used in SDU to CMU Williamsburg messages. If this parameter is set to YES, a SAL of 304 is used regardless of the SAL reported to the CMU. If this parameter is set to NO, the SDU uses the SAL reported by the CMU. If a SAL is not present on the bus after one minute, the CMU uses a SAL of 304.The CMU-SDU HARD CODED SAL parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.To configure the hardcoded SAL: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the CMU-SDU HARD CODED SAL parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To enable hardcoded SAL, type 1, or to disable hardcoded SAL, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is ENABLED.O. Configuring Terminal Operation(1) Configuring Air/Ground Status RestrictionsRestrictions to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal operation are based on whether the terminal is on the ground or in the air. This parameter enables or disables those restrictions. The parameter for air/ground status restrictions is in the secure partition of the ORT.When the air/ground status restriction parameter is enabled, the parameters for self-test in air and transmit on ground behave normally. If the air/ground status restriction parameter is disabled, the parameters for self-test in air and transmit on ground act as if they are enabled.To configure air/ground status restrictions: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the AIR/GROUND STATUS RESTRICTIONS parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To enable the air/ground status restrictions, type 1, or to disable the air/ground status restrictions, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is DISABLED.(2) Configuring Transmit on GroundYou can restrict the ability of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to transmit on the ground. The parameter for transmitting on the ground is in the secure partition of the ORT.To configure transmit on ground: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the TRANSMIT ON GROUND parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To enable HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transmission on the ground, type 1, or to disable HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transmission on the ground type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is DISABLED.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-283 JUN 10(3) Configuring Self-test in AirThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal’s MCDU or MPU can request a power-on self-test. The ORT parameter Self-test in Air determines if the self-test is permitted or not when the aircraft is in the air. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.To configure self-test in air: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SELF-TEST IN AIR parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To enable the self-test in air type 1, or to disable the self-test in air, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is DISABLED.(4) Configuring Maintenance Command Execution in AirYou can reset the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using the MPU if you are logged into the MPU at the MENU or USER level. The Maintenance Command Execution in Air determines if the reset is permitted or not when the aircraft is in the air. The MAINT CMD EXECUTION IN AIR parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.To configure maintenance command execution in air: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MAINT CMD EXECUTION IN AIR parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To enable maintenance commands in the air, type 1, or to disable this feature, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is DISABLED.(5) Configuring MCDU PASTThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can perform a power-on self-test according to a command from an MCDU. You can enable and disable this function with the MCDU PAST parameter. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.To configure MCDU PAST: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MCDU PAST parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To enable the MCDU PAST, type 1, or to disable the MCDU PAST, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is ENABLED.(6) Configuring Field Loadable SoftwareThe HSD-440 terminal can accept file transfers from user equipment connected to Ethernet port one. You can enable and disable this function with the field loadable software parameter. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-293 JUN 10To configure field loadable software: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SW FIELD LOADABLE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To enable the file transfers, type 1, or to disable the file transfers, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is DISABLED.(7) Configuring the Logon/Handover PolicyThe logon/handover policy determines if the equipment automatically logs on, or waits to log on, or changes satellite when the instruction is received from the pilot. The policy options are automatic and manual. The default policy is automatic. The logon/handover policy parameter is in the user partition of the ORT.To configure the logon/handover policy: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the LOG-ON/HANDOVER POLICY parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To select automatic logon, type 1, or to select manual logon, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is AUTOMATIC.(8) Configuring Logon InterrogationThe response to logon interrogation enables the AES to be interrogated. The logon interrogation parameter is in the user partition of the ORT.To enable the logon interrogation: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the RESPONSE TO LOG-ON INTERROGATION parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To enable interrogation, type 1, or to disable interrogation, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is DISABLED.(9) Configuring High-rate R/T in Global BeamThe High-rate R/T in global beam parameter enables or disables high-rate in Global Beam. The high-rate R/T is in the user partition of the ORT.To enable or disable high-rate R/T: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the HIGH RATE R/T IN GLOBAL BEAM parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To enable high-rate in Global Beam, type 1, or to disable high-rate in Global Beam, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is DISABLED.(10)Masking Position in LogsThe HSD-440 terminal can record the position of the aircraft in the HSD-440 terminal logs. You can enable and disable the recording of position information with the mask position in logs parameter. This parameter is in the user partition of the ORT.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-303 JUN 10NOTE: This is the first of several checks that are performed before field software can be loaded.To mask position in logs: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MASK POSITION IN LOGS parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. To enable position masking in logs, type 1, or to disable position masking in logs, type 0, and then press ENTER.The default is DISABLED.(11)Configuring HSD SALThis parameter defines the SAL the terminal uses. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.To configure the HSD SAL: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the HSD SAL parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. Type a three-digit hex value, and then press ENTER.The default is 307.P. Configuring Passive Intermodulation (PIM) ParametersInmarsat requires terminals to perform PIM tests before using SBB services. Section 5: "Passive Intermodulation (PIM) Test" on page 3-16 provides instructions for performing the PIM test. This section describes ORT parameters related to the PIM test.(1) Configuring PIMBIT HGA Azimuth Offset AngleThis parameter defines the azimuth point angle for PIMBIT offset from true north or true south when the terminal is configured to operate with an HGA. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.To configure the PIMBIT HGA Azimuth Offset Angle: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT HGA AZIMUTH OFFSET ANGLE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.The default is 15.0.(2) Configuring PIMBIT IGA Azimuth Offset AngleThis parameter defines the azimuth point angle for the PIM test offset from true north or true south when the terminal is configured to operate with an IGA. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.To configure the PIMBIT IGA Azimuth Offset Angle: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT IGA AZIMUTH OFFSET ANGLE parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.The default is 11.0.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-313 JUN 10(3) Configuring PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angle1This parameter defines the first elevation pointing angle for PIM test offset when the terminal is configured to operate with an IGA. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.To configure the PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angl1e: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT IGA ELEVATION OFFSET ANGLE1 parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.The default is 12.5.(4) Configuring PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angle2This parameter defines the second elevation pointing angle for PIM test offset when the terminal is configured to operate with an IGA. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.To configure the PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angle2: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT IGA ELEVATION OFFSET ANGLE2 parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.The default is 18.0.(5) Configuring PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle1This parameter defines the first elevation pointing angle for PIM test offset when the terminal is configured to operate with an HGA. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.To configure the PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle1: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT HGA ELEVATION OFFSET ANGLE1 parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.The default is 12.5.(6) Configuring PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle2This parameter defines the first elevation pointing angle for PIM test offset when the terminal is configured to operate with an HGA. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.To configure the PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle2: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT HGA ELEVATION OFFSET ANGLE2 parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.The default is 27.5.(7) Configuring PIMBIT Measurement Discard RatioThis parameter defines the number of computed samples to discard from the PIM test calculations.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-323 JUN 10To configure the PIMBIT Measurement Discard Ratio: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT MEASUREMENT DISCARD RATIO parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.The default is 5.0.(8) Configuring PIMBIT Failure ThresholdThis parameter defines the failure threshold level for the PIM test in dBs of channel degradation.To configure the PIMBIT Failure Threshold: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT FAILURE THRESHOLD parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.The default is 3.0.(9) Configuring PIMBIT Pointing Failure ThresholdThis parameter defines the antenna beam pointing fail threshold for the PIM test.To configure the PIMBIT Pointing Failure Threshold: 1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT POINTING FAILURE THRESHOLD parameter, and then press ENTER. 2. Type a positive whole number, and then press ENTER.The default is 1.2. Configuring ORT Parameters Using the EMS ORT ApplicationThe ORT application provides a Graphical User Interface (GUI) for creating and saving ORT configuration files, modifying ORT parameters, and loading ORT configurations into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.Using the ORT application, you can modify all of the same parameters (secure and user) that are available through the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU, as described in "Configuring ORT Parameters Using the MPU" on page 6-1. After you modify ORT parameters, you must export the changed configuration before loading it into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.This section provides information and instructions on how to use the ORT application, including: • Creating an ORT Configuration • Opening a Saved ORT Configuration • Importing a Phone Book Into the ORT Configuration • Exporting an ORT File • Loading an ORT File into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-333 JUN 10 • Searching for an ORT ParameterA. Creating an ORT ConfigurationCreating an ORT configuration includes: • Opening the ORT file template • Editing parameters • Saving the ORT configurationTo open an ORT configuration template: 1. Double-click on the ortedit.exe file.The EMS ORT Application opens. 2. Click File, and then click Open Package.The Choose ORT Package dialog box opens. 3. Navigate to the HSD440.ort file and click Open.The default ORT parameters appear in the EMS ORT Application window.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-343 JUN 10The EMS ORT Application organizes ORT parameters into functional groups. You can access each group by clicking on its tab at the top of the window. A lock symbol marks groups of secure ORT parameters, and an open lock symbol marks the group of user ORT parameters. Click the left and right arrows to see more tabs.The functional groups of parameters are: • Part Number—the part number of the Secure ORT • Satellite Network •MCDU • CMC/CMU •IRS • Antenna • 4-wire/POTS/CEPT-E1 • Routing • Ethernet • System • User—all User parameters
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-353 JUN 10To edit ORT parameters: 1. Click on the tab for the functional group that contains the parameter you wish to edit. 2. Click on a parameter name in the Name column, then click on the parameter value in the Value column.For parameters with text or numerical values, the cursor appears. For parameters with preset options, a menu appears.NOTE: Some parameters are expandable. Click on the plus sign to the left of the parameter name to expand the parameter. Alternatively, right-click on the parameter name and click Expand all. 3. Type or select the new value for the parameter.NOTE: To reset a parameter to its default value, right-click on the parameter and click Reset to default.The ORT application can save an ORT configuration as an XML file. If you do not finish editing all the ORT parameters in one session, you can save the ORT configuration file and re-open it at a later time. The XML file is not uploaded to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, it can only be opened in the ORT application for parameter editing.To save an ORT configuration file: 1. In the EMS ORT Application, click File, and then click Save As.The Save As dialog box opens. 2. In the File name field, type a name for the new ORT configuration, and then click Save.The new ORT configuration is saved as an XML file.B. Opening a Saved ORT ConfigurationThe EMS ORT Application saves ORT configurations as XML files. You can open these XML files in the EMS ORT Application.To open a saved ORT configuration: 1. In the EMS ORT Application, click File, and then click Open.The Select a file dialog box appears. 2. Click on a saved ORT configuration and then click Open.The saved ORT configuration appears in the EMS ORT Application window.C. Importing a Phone Book Into the ORT ConfigurationThe EMS ORT Application can import data into its Address book parameter. The data in the Address book parameter includes: • Name—the name displayed to identify the address book entry • Number—the phone number • Priority—the priority setting for calls to this number • MCDU Editable—enables and disables changes to this entry from the MCDU
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-363 JUN 10The ORT Address book parameter includes four categories with 100 entries in each category. You can create and import a separate file for each category. The EMS ORT Application creates address book entries from imported Comma Separated Value (CSV) files that have the .csv file extension. You can create .csv files with Microsoft® Excel®.Importing a phone book includes: • Creating a .csv file • Importing the .csv file into the EMS ORT ApplicationTo create a .csv file: 1. Open Microsoft Excel. 2. Type the following into the specified cells, as shown below: • cell A1—addressBook/addressBookCategory[1] • The EMS ORT Application adds the entries in this file into Category 1 of the Address book. • To create categories two, three, and four, change the category number inside the square brackets. You need to create a separate .csv file for each category. • cell A2—abeName • cell B2—abeNumber • cell C2—abePriority • cell D2—abeMCDUEditable 3. For each entry you want to add to the address book, type data in the columns abeName, abeNumber, abePriority, and abeMCDUEditable. Each row represents one address book entry: • In column abeName, type the name of the address book entry. The maximum length of the name is 14 alphanumeric characters. • In column abeNumber, type the phone number without hyphens or spaces. The maximum length of the phone number is 18 digits. • In the column abePriority, type the priority of this entry. Priority may be one of OP-HI, OP-LO, NON-OP, or EMG. • In the abeMDCUEditable column, type YES or NO to indicate if this entry is editable from the MCDU.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-373 JUN 10 4. Save the spreadsheet as a .csv file.To import a .csv file: 1. Open the EMS ORT Application. 2. Open an ORT file or create a new file—refer to “Creating an ORT Configuration” on page 6-33 and “Opening a Saved ORT Configuration” on page 6-35. 3. In the EMS ORT Application, click File, and then click Import Phonebook.The Choose CSV File dialog box appears. 4. Click on the CSV file and then click Open.The Import Phonebook message confirms the number of entries imported from the CSV file, and the EMS ORT Application adds the entries to the ORT configuration.D. Exporting an ORT FileThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal control processor uses a special file type that you can export from the EMS ORT Application. When you export a file, the EMS ORT Application creates two files—one for the control processor and one text (.txt) file for your reference.To export an ORT file: 1. In the EMS ORT Application, click File, and then click Export.The Choose Output File dialog box appears. 2. Type a new file name (no extension) in the File name box and then click Save.The ORT configuration is exported (two files are created) and the Export Document dialog box appears. 3. Click OK.E. Loading an ORT File into the HSD-440 Mark 2 TerminalYou can load an exported ORT file into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal through the Ethernet connection.To load the ORT file you’ll need: • A computer with the tftp applicationAn ethernet cable • A serial cable—see section b: "Maintenance Port Cable Assembly" on page 4-37. • The IP address of the terminal’s Ethernet 1 port
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 6-383 JUN 10To load an ORT file into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal: 1. Connect a computer to an Ethernet port and the Maintenance Port on the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. 2. Copy the ORT file to the computer. 3. Start a HyperTerminal session to the Maintenance port of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.Section c: "Interface Requirements" on page 4-38 provides the settings for this connection. 4. To access the Maintenance Port Utility, type the password maint.The password does not appear on the screen. 5. To navigate to Menu 2, press CTRL + N. 6. To allow tftp access to the terminal, in Menu 2, press l. 7. At the prompt, type the new password allowtftp.A message confirms that tftp is allowed for ten minutes. 8. On your computer, click Start, and then click Run.The Run dialog box appears. 9. In the Open field, type cmd.The Command window appears. 10.Navigate to the directory that includes the new ORT file. 11. To load the ORT file, type tftp -i xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx put filename. • xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx represents the IP address of the Ethernet 1 port. • filename represents the name of the new ORT file.When the tftp application loaded the file to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, a short message confirms the number of bytes transferred. 12.To transfer the ORT parameters to the SCM, in Menu 3, press r. 13.At the prompt to transfer the ORT parameters to the SCM, type yesido.The number of transferred bytes indicates the transfer progress.The ORT file load is complete.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 A-13 JUN 10APPENDIX A: INMARSAT SATELLITE BEAM COVERAGEInmarsat operates strategically placed geostationary satellites called I-3 and I-4. I-3 satellites provide access to services such as Swift 64 and Aero H/H+, and I-4 satellites provide access to SBB and Aero H/H+ services.1. I-3 SatellitesEach I-3 satellite is located over and named after an OR. The four satellite ORs are: • Atlantic Ocean Region-East (AOR-E)• Atlantic Ocean Region-West (AOR-W)• Indian Ocean Region (IOR)• Pacific Ocean Region (POR)Figure A-1 represents the ORs with approximate transfer coordinates for satellite transitions.Figure A-1  ORs
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 A-23 JUN 10The four satellite ORs are made up of smaller, spot-beam coverage areas. The following maps show the Inmarsat satellite spot-beam coverage for the four ORs, and a composite map of the four regions combined.NOTE: Figure A-2 and Figure A-3 depict Inmarsat's expectations of coverage but do not represent a guarantee of service and should not be relied upon. The availability of service at the edge of coverage areas fluctuates depending upon a variety of conditions.Figure A-2  Inmarsat I-3 Satellite Beam Coverage—Composite Map
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 A-33 JUN 10Figure A-3  Inmarsat I-3 Satellite Beam Coverage—OR Maps
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 A-43 JUN 102. I-4 SatellitesThere are three I-4 satellites in service: • I-4 Americas (98W) • I-4 EMEA (25E) • I-4 Asia-Pacific (143.5E)Figure A-4 shows the I-4 satellite coverage regions.Figure A-4  Inmarsat I-4 Satellite Beam Coverage Map
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 B-13 JUN 10APPENDIX B: TROUBLESHOOTING CHECKLISTBefore performing the detailed testing and troubleshooting procedures provided in this manual, read the following Troubleshooting Checklist. Use the Troubleshooting Checklist to make sure that you have not missed any key steps in the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal setup. 1. Have you registered with a service provider to activate service?You must activate an account with an Inmarsat-authorized service provider to access the Satellite Communications network using an HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. Contact Inmarsat for a list of available service providers at:Inmarsat Customer Care 99 City Road, London, EC1Y 1AXTel: +44 20 7728 1777 Fax: +44 20 7728 1142E-mail: customer_care@inmarsat.com 2. Has your account been activated? Once registered, your HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is assigned terminal identification numbers called FWD IDs. If you have SBB service, service information also includes IMSI. The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal must be strapped accordingly. Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed strapping and installation instructions. NOTE: The service registration information may take a few days to be incorporated into the system databases at the LESGES level. New terminals being commissioned are not validated by the LES/GES until their customer database has been updated by Inmarsat to reflect the registration and activation of your terminal.NOTE: To verify that the service registration information has been validated at the LES/GES, call 33 POUND KEY for assistance. Confirm with the LES/GES operator that the FWD IDs assigned to your terminal are valid and active. 3. Is the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal seated properly?In cases where the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is not fully seated into the ARINC 600 connector (to the rear of the Fan Tray), the user may experience intermittent system operation. If intermittent system operation occurs:• Check that the polarization pins are installed correctly as indicated on the applicable Outline and Installation diagram. • Make sure that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is fully inserted into the tray and that the front hold-down screws are securely tightened.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 B-23 JUN 10 4. Is all cabling attached correctly and securely? Broken connections and improper cabling are the most common causes of HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal malfunctions. Before proceeding with testing and troubleshooting, complete the following checks:• Check that all cables and wiring are routed and connected correctly and securely.• Make sure that the terminal is installed with the correct power source. • Verify that all external user and networking devices (for example: TAs, routers, fax, telephones, computers) are connected and configured properly. 5. Have any changes to the system been made? For previously installed and functional terminals, make note of any changes made to the system since the last time the terminal functioned without problems. • Were any new devices or systems connected to the terminal?• Have any connecting devices or equipment been removed or replaced? If so, check that all new or replaced connections are attached and configured correctly.• Have you changed service providers or re-configured the system in any way?  6. Are your Primary and Secondary LES/GES Access Codes programmed for all ORs? The system default for LES/GES access codes is set to 0 (zero), which must be configured to valid LES/GES access codes before operation. Refer to "System Operation" on page 2-1 for details. 7. Was the operational mode of the system strapped or configured correctly?Verify that the system mode wiring straps match the installation configuration mode.  8. Are the SIM cards activated?Activate report 69 and check that the OC column of the report shows ATCH (attached) then dial a SBB call. 9. Is the APN set?Verify that the APN is set. 1. Navigate to Menu 3 in the Maintenance Port Utility. 2. In the list of ORT parameters, navigate to and type the number next to the miscellaneous EEPROM settings. 3. To view or set the APN, type the number next to the APN and then press ENTER. 10.Are GES preferences correctly set?To verify GES preferences: 1. Navigate to Menu 3 in the Maintenance Port Utility. 2. In the list of ORT parameters, navigate to and type the number next to the Ocean Region parameters.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 B-33 JUN 10 3. To view GES preferences, type the number next to the GES preference, and then press ENTER.The GES priority table appears.The eNfusion® HSD High-speed Data Terminal Developer’s Guide, MN-1252-13005, provides more information about GES preferences.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 B-43 JUN 10Blank Page
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 C-13 JUN 10APPENDIX C: RJ45 CABLE TERMINATION DETAILS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 C-23 JUN 10Blank Page
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 D-13 JUN 10APPENDIX D: INSTALLATION PLANNING CHECKLISTInstallation Planning Steps1. Register the terminal for services (if applicable)Record the following information (provided by Honeywell upon purchase)Inmarsat Serial Numbers (ISN) x  12IMSI #1Contact your Service Provider and provide the 12-digit ISNs from aboveRecord the FWD IDs received (from your Service Provider or from Inmarsat) and corresponding Inmarsat Mobile Numbers (IMN)  FWD IDs(last 6 digits of ISN)IMNsISDN SpeechISDN(3.1 kHz audio)ISDN 56 kbpsISDN 64 kbpsMPDSService Provider AOR-W AOR-E IOR POR 2. Register the terminal for SBB services (if applicable)APN Master MSISDN AMSISDN 1 ISDN 56 (RDI) AMSISDN 1 ISDN64 (UDI) 
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 D-23 JUN 10AMSISDN 5 CSFAX (3.1 kHz audio)3. Pin StrappingThe following strapping is requiredItem Strapped pins, e.g., TP1A to BP1ASystem Mode Data I/O(if applicable)4. WiringAntenna Multi-Control BITE A/B HPA Mute A/B Power ISDN:Wire ISDN line. Channel 1 operates over ISDN 1 and channel 3 over ISDN 2. ISDN-1 ISDN-2 Ethernet:Wire both Ethernet ports for SBB capabilityWire both Ethernet ports to deploy 2 separate networks Ethernet-1 Ethernet-2 Inertial Navigation System (INS) Analog Tip/Ring  5. ConfigurationProgram the Land Earth Station (LES)/Ground Earth Station (GES) Access Codes Program devices with the Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSN) Configure the CNX Cabin Gateway if required Installation Planning Steps
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 E-13 JUN 10APPENDIX E: INSTALLATION CHECKLISTAircraft Identification: HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal  Model No:HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Installation Mode: HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Serial No:Name Signature DateChecks completed by:Approved/Witnessed by:Section Parameter Item N/A 9ValueInstallation / MechanicalPhysicalService/maintenance accessEnvironmental considerations—see "Environmental Requirements" on page 3-2Fan TrayPlug configuration—see "Fan Tray Requirements" on page 3-3Chassis bonding—see "Chassis Grounding" on page 3-4Fan rotation—unobstructedARINC 600 Con. Polarized pins
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 E-23 JUN 10Move the aircraft in a circle and check the signal and C/No.Installation / ElectricalPower Connections+ 28 V dc polarity115 V ac polarityChassis groundingVoltage Levels + 28 V dc level115 V ac levelIRS Input (x2) IRS wiringIRS formatConfig. Strap PinsSDISystem configurationICAO addressWOW (optional)Ethernet Wired to RJ45 distribution points (x2)ISDN Wired to RJ45 distribution pointsRemotesManual reset switch operationMaintenance port (DB9 access)Power and fault indicatorsRF Coaxial Rx input cable lossTx output cable lossAntenna Antenna manufacturer and typeWired as per manufacturerConfiguration LES/GES access codesICAO IDCEPT Wired to distribution pointCMU/CMC Wired to equipmentMCDU/WSCI Wired to equipment4-Wire (x2) Wired to equipmentPOTS Wired to distribution pointTestSystem Power-UpVisual LED indicationsPower-up computer displayTest On-AirSystem LogonReset message observedLogon verified for Swift 64 and SBBTestOptional Checks Ground segmentFlight segmentSection Parameter Item N/A 9Value
Heading (Deg)  Antenna Selected Antenna Azimuth HSD-440 Mark 2 TerminalSwift 64 or SBB ClassicCH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 CH 5Note: Channels 3, 4, and 5 can be different than channels 1, and 2.C/NoSignalC/NoSignalC/No SignalC/NoSignalC/No Signal153045607590105120135150165180195210225240255270285300315330345360SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 E-33 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 E-43 JUN 10Blank Page
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 F-13 JUN 10APPENDIX F: CMU MESSAGESThe CMU communicates with the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using two types of communications: Broadcast messages and Bit Oriented Protocol (BOP) messages. Both types of communication are supported at the same time.This section includes descriptions of the messages that the CMU will transmit to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and receive from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.In this communication type, the CMU uses an ARINC 429 bus to convey status word exchanges, join/leave words, and other control and command communications to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using conventional ARINC 429 broadcast techniques.The CMU can transmit messages to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and receive messages from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using this communication type.1. Understanding Messages Transmitted to the HSD-440 Mark 2 TerminalThis section provides details about the words sent to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal from the CMUs: • Understanding System Identification Label 172 • Understanding Status Word 1; Label 270 • Understanding Status Word 2; Label 276 • Understanding Protocol File Transfer to CMU via WilliamsburgA. Understanding System Identification Label 172Each CMU transmits system identification label 172 (SAL 304) to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. Attachment 6 from ARINC Characteristic 758 describes the word format of this label. Any other SAL is ignored.B. Understanding Status Word 1; Label 270Each CMU transmits status word 1 to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. The standby CMU checks to see if its status words are the same as the active CMU using its cross-talk connections.The HSD-440 terminal uses bit 20 to determine which CMU is active. When bit 20 is set, that CMU is active, and the other CMU should have its bit 20 cleared. In the event of an error and both CMUs are shown as active, the CMU on input port 1 is considered active. Table F-1  Status Word 1 Bit Label Meaning9270 Determines the position of the CMU in the cockpit; see Table F-210 270 Determines the position of the CMU in the cockpit; see Table F-220 270 Determines which CMU is active and which is on standby
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 F-23 JUN 10The CMU transmits its position in the cockpit to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using bits 9 and 10, as shown in Table F-2. Table F-2  Bits 9 and 10 Positions SDI 1 (bit 9) SDI 2 (bit 10) Position0 0 Single0 1 Left1 0 Right1 1 Not usedAttachment 6 from ARINC Characteristic 758 describes the word format of this label.C. Understanding Status Word 2; Label 276Each CMU transmits status word 2 to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal determines which CMU is sending the message based upon bits 9/10 (the SDI) as detailed in Table F-2.The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses the SAT Link parameter (bit 19) to determine if the CMU is receiving the appropriate link status from the HSD-440 terminal.Attachment 6 from ARINC Characteristic 758 describes the word format of this label.D. Understanding Protocol File Transfer to SDU1 via WilliamsburgData is transferred to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using Williamsburg protocol. Williamsburg messages use the SAL of the equipment they are talking to as the label. In this case, the label is 307 as the sub-system identifier label sent from the HSD-440 to the CMU is 307. For more information, refer to "Understanding Word Format" on page F-7. 2. Understanding Messages Received from the HSD-440 Mark 2 TerminalThis section provides details about the words sent from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal from the CMUs: • Understanding System Identification Label 172 • Understanding Status Word 1; Label 270 • Understanding Join/Leave Word; Label 271 • Understanding Protocol File Transfer to CMU via WilliamsburgA. Understanding System Identification Label 172The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transmits subsytem identifier label 172 which contains the subsystem SAL in bits 9 to 16. The SAL is set to 307 (octal). Also: • Bit 17 is set to indicate Inmarsat Aero • Bits 18-31 are used for other Satcom services (or are spare) and are set to 0
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 F-33 JUN 10 • Bit 32 indicates parityYou can find the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal identity information in the ORT. If no information is available, the terminal identifies itself as SAL 307 by default.ARINC 781 Supplement 1 describes the word format of these labels.B. Understanding Status Word 1; Label 270Bits are defined as shown in Table F-3. Table F-3  Status Word 1 Bits Bit(s) Description If Set9–10 SDI (per ARINC Specification 429 Section 2.1.4) •Set to 00, all call11 Data Link via CMU Inactive  •  HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is not able to offer Aero H data services (due to a hardware fault or terminal is not logged on) • ORT indicates that only CMU #1 is wired and label 270 is missing for 3 or more seconds • ORT indicates that only CMU #2 is wired and label 270 is missing for 3 or more seconds • ORT indicates that both CMU #1 and CMU #2 are wired and both label 270 are missing for 3 ore more seconds12 CMU 1 Inactive  • CMU #1 bus label 270 is missing for 3 or more seconds • Label 270 SSM coded to fail • Label 270 bit 20 is not set13 Voice Unavailable  • Class Aero is not logged on • Login Class is 1 or 4 (data only)14 SELCAL This bit is set during the period when a ground to air call, including a preemptive call, is being signaled but unanswered. If set:  • Indicates that a new cockpit voice circuit has been established for a ground-initiated call • Depending on the aircraft setting, this bit may result in a visual annunciation of the new call on the EICAS/ECAM/EDU and activation of the cockpit chime • Crew should refer to the EICAS/ECAM/EDU to determine which system is annunciating the call • Bit should remain set until an appropriate acknowledgement is received • Crew should make sure that the bit has been cleared in all transmitted samples for at least two seconds prior to being set, and then set for at least four seconds or until the annunciation is acknowledged, whichever occurs last
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 F-43 JUN 10* These bits are cleared when the chime light inhibit discrete signal is asserted.15 Message Alert with Chime  • Refer to MCDU messages for timely information • Terminal should clear this bit once positive pilot response has been detected16 Message Alert without Chime  • This bit is never set, it is reserved for future use.17 Not Logged-On  • Terminal is not logged onto a ground station18 Master/Slave  • This bit is never set, slave operation is not supported. •19 CMU 2 Inactive  • CMU 2 transmission of valid Label 270 is detected inactive • Label 270 SSM coded to fail on CMU #2 • Label 270 bit 20 is not set20 Cockpit Fault  • Not used21 Cockpit Voice Fault  • Not used22 Voice Call 1  • Terminal has detected a low priority (4) flight deck incoming voice call on channel 123 Voice Call 2  • Terminal has detected a low priority (4) flight deck incoming voice call on channel 224 Voice Alert 1  • Terminal has detected a high priority (1, 2, or 3) flight deck incoming voice call on channel 125 Voice Alert 2  • Terminal has detected a high priority (1, 2, or 3) flight deck incoming voice call on channel 226 Cockpit Voice Communication 1  • A cockpit voice communication is connected on channel 127 Cockpit Voice Communication 2  • A cockpit voice communication is connected on channel 228  • Never set29 Data  • No active CMU is available at the SDU, or the active CMU does not respond with a Loop Word in response to a Test Word • This bit being set can be caused by the following:  • Bus inactivity on all CMU inputs • Bus activity, but no declared active CMU • Bit may be used to set a cockpit advisory message (for example, >SATCOM DATA) indicating to the flight crew a loss of data link capability due to a failure in the CMU interface. Table F-3  Status Word 1 Bits (Continued)Bit(s) Description If Set
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 F-53 JUN 10C. Understanding Join/Leave Word; Label 271Each of the Aeronautical Telecommunications Network (ATN) subnetworks transmits join and leave words to the CMU whenever a path to a specified ground address changes.The join event notifies the CMU that a new path to a specified ground address is available, triggering ATN air-to-ground communications. The leave event notifies the CMU that a path to a specified ground address has been closed, ending ATN air-to-ground communications.The Join/Leave word (label 271) is transmitted on the CMU bus at a minimum rate of once per second or be event driven based on log on and log off events as specified by the 'CMU - SDU JOIN/LEAVE WORD TRANSMISSION' ORT parameter.Table F-4 shows the definitions of the bits in the join/leave word. Table F-4  Join/Leave Word Bits Bits DefinesBits 8–1 Word Label 271: • Uses the A429 convention • Coded as 10011101Bits 16–9 GES ID:  • 0 is an invalid ID • FF is used for all GESs • ID numbers between 1 and FE are valid GES IDs • GES ID is known to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal • Bits are cleared when the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is not logged onBits 22–17 Satellite IDBits 25–23 Inmarsat Service: • Aero H+ 011Bits 28–26 Not used; padded with zerosBit 29 Data link from the AES to the GES: • Available (a Join message; Bit = 1) • Not Available (a Leave message; Bit = 0) • Identified by the GES ID and Satellite ID fields • CMU uses this information to initiate network layer virtual circuits with available ground routers by determining the ground routers’ DTE addresses from the provided GES identity • Bits 9–16, (GES) and Bits 17–22 (Satellite ID) uniquely identify a GES • Aero Service Type field may be used by the CMU to make routing decisions • Bit is cleared when the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is not logged on.Bits 31–30 SSM information (ARINC 429 para 2.1.5.2)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 F-63 JUN 10D. Understanding Protocol File Transfer to CMU via WilliamsburgData is transferred to the CMU using Williamsburg protocol. Williamsburg messages use the SAL of the equipment they are talking to as the label. In this case, the label is 304 as the sub-system identifier label sent from the HSD-440 to the CMU is 304. For more information, refer to "Understanding Word Format" on page F-7. NOTE: Universal brand CMUs broadcast a different SAL in Label 172, but expect transmission on a SAL of 304. This is achieved through the use of the CMU-SDU HARD CODED SAL ORT parameter.3. Understanding BOP OptionsThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses the following BOP options for the CMU interface. The ORT specifies the values for these options. If no information is available, then the options default to the values shown in Table F-5. Table F-5  BOP Option Defaults Option  Value  Notes O1 Half Half or Full Duplex OperationO2 ORT value High or Low Speed BusLow speed is defaultO3 No Automatic CTS when readyO4 No Accept Automatic CTSO5 Yes (high-speed data terminal) System Priority to Resolve RTS ConflictO6 -- SpareO7 -- SpareO8 Yes Use of SOLO word(TEST/LOOP)O9 -- SpareO10 Yes Destination code in RTS/CTS /NCTS/BUSY UsedO11 Yes Bit-Protocol verificationO12 No Use subsystem SAL from ALO word
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 F-73 JUN 104. Understanding LDUs and File SizeBOP messages use Link Data Units (LDUs) encoded in binary octets to transmit data. LDUs conform to the following rules: • The data is transmitted from a source and is received by a sink. • LDUs consist of a set of contiguous ARINC 429 32 bit data words. • The initial data word of each LDU shall be a Start of Transmission (SOT) word. • The end data word of each LDU shall be an End of Transmission (EOT). • No data file shall exceed 255 LDUs.5. Understanding LDU Size and Word CountLDUs may vary in size from 3 to 255 ARINC 429 words. The minimum LDU consists of one SOT word, one data word, and one EOT word, and the maximum LDU consists of one SOT, 253 data words, and one EOT. The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal calculates word count when it organizes an LDU for transmission. The word count appears in the RTS and CTS data words. See "Understanding Protocol Words" on page F-9.6. Understanding Word FormatThe general word format of a BOP word is given in ARINC 429 (Attachment 11, Table 11-A). The bit definitions are shown in Table F-6. Table F-6  BOP Word Format Bit Position Description8-1 SAL24-9 Data (28-9 for full data words)28-25 GFI, control data or word type extensions31-29 Word type32 Parity bitA. Understanding SALsThe HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal sends LDUs by point to point by using a label field to carry the destination SAL; therefore, each LDU that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal sends is prefixed by the SAL for the CMU, SAL 304. The SAL for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is 307 (if designated SDU 1) or 173 (if designated SDU 2). See ARINC 429, Part 1, attachment 1-1 for a complete list of all SALs.B. Understanding DataData is sent in 4 or 5 nibble words. See "Understanding Word Types" on page F-8
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 F-83 JUN 10C. Understanding General Format Identifier (GFI) DefinitionsTable F-7 defines the GFI definitions. Table F-7  GFI Definitions File Type ToGFICMU   HSD-440 Mark 2 TerminalLabel  Destination Code Label Destination CodeData 2 enveloped message  304 M307 (1) S1110b (Eh)A GFI of 1110 b indicates a data 2 Enveloped ACARS Message. This message indicates to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal that this message is to be passed on through the ACARS network. Only one message is transferred per link layer ARINC 429 file. If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is unable to deliver an enveloped message to its destination (CMU or GES), the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal discards the message.A data-2 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transmits to the GES all messages passed from the avionics network interface during the time that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged on. If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is not logged on, any messages passed to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal shall be discarded. While the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged on, any messages received from the GES shall be forwarded to the avionics network interface regardless of the state or availability of the destination avionics equipment.Any CMU message contains a destination code of M if it arrives from the ground to the CMU. Similarly, any message originating from the CMU that is destined for a GES contains a destination code of S. These codes are embedded in the RTS, CTS, and NCTS protocol words (See "Understanding Protocol Words" on page F-9).7. Understanding Word TypesThe word types in Table F-8 are valid. For a full definition, see ARINC 429 P3, attachment 11. Table F-8  Word Types 31  30  29  WORD TYPE 0  0  0  Full Binary Data Word 0  0  1  Partial Binary Data Word 0  1  0  Start of Frame—Version 3 0  1  1  End of Frame—Version 3 1  0  0  Protocol Word 1  0  1  Solo Word1  1  0  Start Of Transmission—Version 1 1  1  1  End Of Transmission—Version 1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 F-93 JUN 10A. Understanding the Full Binary Data WordThis word shall transmit 5 nibbles of data. See ARINC 429P3 Attachment 11 for details.B. Understanding the Partial Binary Data WordThis word shall transmit 4 or less nibbles of data. See ARINC 429P3 Attachment 11 for details.C. Understanding Protocol WordsThe protocol words are shown in Table F-9. The protocol identifier occupies bits 28-25 of the protocol word. Table F-9  Protocol Words and Uses Protocol word UsesRTS (Request to Send)The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal issues an RTS to the CMU when it is ready to send an LDU. The RTS contains a destination code (bits 24–17) and a word count (bits 16–9).CTS (Clear to Send)When the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal receives an RTS, it issues a CTS to the CMU when the CMU is ready to send an LDU. The CTS contains the same destination code and word count as the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal received in the RTS. Bit 11 of the Status Word Label 270 from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal indicates when a satellite link is available to proceed if this is a ground destination message.NCTS (Not Clear to Send)When the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal either receives a valid RTS and is not ready to accept data or receives an RTS with an invalid destination or word count, it responds with an NCTS. The NCTS contains a destination code (bits 24–17).NAK (negative acknowledgement)If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal notes a missing SOT or EOT word, parity error, word count error, CRC error, or time out error, it will respond with a NAK. The NAK contains the same file sequence number in bits 24–17 as the SOT word.ACK (acknowledgement) If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transfers each word within the designated time and with odd parity, correct word count, and verified CRC. The LDU is either next, first, or a duplicate. Then the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal sends an ACK. The ACK word contains the file sequence number (bits 24–17) and the LDU sequence number (bits 16–9).ALO (aloha)The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can initiate BOP V1 communication by sending an ALO word out on the bus.The first ALO word that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transmits contains the highest version number it supports (bits 12–9). This word determines the correct protocol to use for the exchange. The ALO also sends its own SAL (bits 24–17). ALR (aloha response)When the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal receives an ALO word, it leaves its present task and responds with an ALR word. The response contains the protocol version level supported.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 F-103 JUN 10D. Understanding the Solo WordIf the data the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is sending consists of only 1 or 2 octets, then the data can be sent blind using the solo word instead of obtaining a CTS. Solo words conform to the following rules: • The solo word contains a 16 bit data field in bits 24–9 • Bits 31–29 are permanently set to 101b • Solo words are not acknowledged at the link level • Solo words are not interleaved with data file words during a data file transfer, however if the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal receives a solo word during data transfer, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal shall process the solo word normally and resume file transmission or reception. The solo word also performs test and loop back functions to test the integrity of the ARINC 429 bus interconnection between the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and the CMU.The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can send a 16 bit loop test pattern word (TEST) on the ARINC 429 TX bus. The CMU then responds with the identical loop test pattern word (LOOP) on the ARINC 429 RX bus. If the LOOP does not match the TEST, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal indicates a TEST failure. If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal receives a TEST on its ARINC 429 RX bus, it responds by transmitting an identical LOOP on the ARINC 429 TX bus.A 4 bit identifier (bits 28–25) identifies the nature of the data being sent by the solo word. The three types of data are shown in Table F-10.SYN The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transmits a SYN word to inform the CMU that the construction of the last file that was transmitted is confused. The reception of a SYN word causes the CMU to abort any reception or transmission in progress. In addition, if the CMU was transmitting, it should re-initiate transmission of the file that was aborted.Destination code RTS, CTS, and NTCS words use a destination code. The destination code field (when used, bits 24–17) indicates the final destination of the LDU. If the LDU will be used in the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, the destination code can be set to 00h. If the LDU is intended to be passed on to another onboard system, the destination code indicates that system.Word count RTS and CTS words use a word count. The word count field (bits 16–9) reflects the number of ARINC 429 words that will be transmitted in a subsequent LDU. The maximum word count value is 255 ARINC 429 words. Table F-9  Protocol Words and Uses (Continued)Protocol word Uses Table F-10  Data Types Purpose Bits 28-25b DescriptionTest 0000b 16 Bit Test Pattern
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 F-113 JUN 10E. Understanding Start of Transmission (SOT)When the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal receives a valid CTS with the destination code and word count of the previous RTS, then it responds by sending an SOT word immediately before the LDU. The SOT contains the file sequence number, the GFI, and the LDU sequence number.The file sequence number (bits 24–17) of the SOT word is an 8 bit number assigned to the data file. It is initialized to 00h and increments by 1h for each new file sent over the link. After reaching FFh, the file sequence number returns to 01h and recommences incrementing by 1h for each new file sent. A file consisting of multiple LDUs has the same file sequence number in each SOT word of each LDU. The file sequence number is also used in ACK and NAK words.The LDU sequence number (bits 16–9) of the SOT word is an 8 Bit number assigned to the LDU. It is initialized to 00h and increments by 1h for each LDU sent (of the same file). The LDU sequence number resets to 00h at the beginning of each new file. The LDU sequence number is also used in the ACK word.F. Understanding End of Transmission (EOT)Each LDU is terminated by an EOT word. Bit 25 indicates if this LDU is the final LDU of the transfer. If it is, then this bit shall be set to 1; if it is not the final LDU, it shall be set to 0. The EOT also contains the CRC word in bits 24–9. See ARINC 429 P3, paragraph 2.5.12, for details on generating and decoding the CRC word.Loop 0001b 16 Bit Loop BackSolo Word ID 16 Bit Data Filed Table F-10  Data Types (Continued)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 F-123 JUN 10Blank Page
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 G-13 JUN 10APPENDIX G: INTERNATIONAL ACCESS AND COUNTRY CODESTable G-1 shows a list of countries with their associated country codes and international access codes. Table G-1  International Access and Country Codes Country Country Code International Access CodeAfghanistan 93 00Albania 355 00Algeria 213 00Angola 244 00Anguilla +1 (264) 011Antigua +1 (268) 011Argentina 54 00Armenia 374 00Aruba 297 00Australia 61 00 11Austria 43 00Bahamas +1 (242) 011Bahrain 973 00Bangladesh 880 00Barbados +1 (246) 011Belarus 375 810Belgium 32 00Belize 501 00Benin 229 00Bermuda +1 (441) 011Bolivia 591 00 10Bosnia and Hercegovina 387 99Botswana 267 00Brazil 55 00British Virgin Islands +1 (284) 011Bulgaria 359 00Burkina Faso 226 00Burma (Myanmar) 95 00Burundi 257 90Cambodia 855 001
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 G-23 JUN 10Cameroon 237 00Canada 1011Cape Verde 238 0Cayman Islands +1 (345) 011Central African Republic 236 19Chad 235 15Chile 56 00China 86 00Colombia 57 009Comoros 269 00Congo (Brazzaville) 242 00Congo (Kinshasa, formerly Zaire) 243 00Cook Islands 682 00Costa Rica 506 00Cote d'Ivoire (Ivory Coast) 225 00Croatia 385 99Cuba 53 119Cyprus 357 00Czech Republic 420 00Denmark 45 00Diego-Garcia 246 00Djibouti 253 00Dominica +1 (767) 011Dominican Republic +1 (809), +1 (829) 011East Timor 670 00Ecuador 593 00Egypt 20 00El Salvador 503 0Equatorial Guinea 240 00Eritrea 291 00Estonia 372 810Ethiopia 251 00Falkland Islands 500 01Faroe Islands 298 009Fiji 679 5Finland 358 00France 33 00 Table G-1  International Access and Country Codes (Continued)Country Country Code International Access Code
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 G-33 JUN 10French Antilles 590 00French Guiana 594 00French Polynesia 689 00Gabon 241 00Gambia 220 00Germany 49 00Ghana 233 00Gibraltar 350 00Greece 30 00Greenland 299 009Grenada +1 (473) 011Guam +1 (671) 011Guatemala 502 00Guinea 224 00Guinea-Bissau 245 00Guyana 592 001Haiti 509 00Honduras 504 00Hong Kong 852 001Hungary 36 00Iceland 354 90India 91 900Indonesia 62 001, 008Iran 98 00Iraq 964 00Ireland 353 00Israel 972 00Italy 39 00Ivory Coast (Cote d'Ivoire) 225 00Jamaica +1 (876) 011Japan 81 010Jordan 962 00Kazakstan 7810Kenya 254 000Kuwait 965 00Kyrgyz Republic 996 00Laos 856 00 Table G-1  International Access and Country Codes (Continued)Country Country Code International Access Code
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 G-43 JUN 10Latvia 371 810Lebanon 961 00Lesotho 266 00Liberia 231 00Libya 218 00Liechtenstein 423 00Lithuania 370 00Luxembourg 352 00Macao 853 00Macedonia 389 00Madagascar 261 16Malawi 265 101Malaysia 60 00Maldives 960 00Mali 223 00Malta 356 356Marshall Islands 692 011Martinique 596 00Mauritania 222 00Mauritius 230 00Mayotte and Reunion 262 10Mexico 52 98Micronesia 691 011Moldova 373 00Monaco 377 00Mongolia 976 001Montenegro 382 00Montserrat +1 (664) 011Morocco 212 00Mozambique 258 00Namibia 264 00Nauru 674 00Nepal 977 00Netherlands 31 00New Caledonia 687 00New Zealand 64 00Nicaragua 505 00 Table G-1  International Access and Country Codes (Continued)Country Country Code International Access Code
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 G-53 JUN 10Niger 227 00Nigeria 234 009Niue Island 683 00North Korea 850 00Northern Mariana Islands (Commonwealth of) +1 (670) 011Norway 47 095Oman 968 00Pakistan 92 00Palau 680 011Palestine 970 00Panama 507 00Papua New Guinea 675 05Paraguay 595 002Peru 51 00Philippines 63 00Poland 48 00Portugal 351 00Puerto Rico +1 (787) 011Qatar 974 00Romania 40 71Russia 7810Rwanda 250 00Samoa 685 0San Marino 378 00Saudi Arabia 966 00Senegal 221 00Serbia 381 99Seychelles 248 00Sierra Leone 232 00Singapore 65 001Slovakia 421 00Slovenia 386 99Solomon Islands 677 00Somalia 252 00South Africa 27 00South Korea 82 00 Table G-1  International Access and Country Codes (Continued)Country Country Code International Access Code
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 G-63 JUN 10Spain 34 00Sri Lanka 94 00St Helena and Tristan da Cunha 290 00St Kitts +1 (869) 011St Lucia +1 (758) 011St Pierre and Miquelon 508 00St Vincent +1 (784) 011Sudan 249 00Suriname 597 002Swaziland 268 00Sweden 46 00Switzerland 41 00Syria 963 00Taiwan 886 002Tajikistan 992 810Tanzania 255 000Thailand 66 001Togolese Republic 228 00Tokelau 690 00Tonga 676 09Trinidad and Tobago +1 (868) 011Tunisia 216 00Turkey 90 99Turkmenistan 993 810Turks and Caicos +1 (649) 011Tuvalu, Ellice Islands 688 00U.S. Pacific Islands +1 670, +1 671, +1 684 011U.S. Virgin Islands +1 (340) 011Uganda 256 000Ukraine 380 810United Arab Emirates 971 00United Kingdom 44 00United States 1011Uruguay 598 00Uzbekistan 998 810Vanuatu 678 00 Table G-1  International Access and Country Codes (Continued)Country Country Code International Access Code
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 G-73 JUN 10Vatican City +39, +379 00Venezuela 58 00Vietnam 84 00Wallis and Futuna 681 19Yemen 967 00Yugoslavia (+38 discontinued) 99Zambia 260 00Zimbabwe 263 110 Table G-1  International Access and Country Codes (Continued)Country Country Code International Access Code
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 G-83 JUN 10Blank Page
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 H-13 JUN 10APPENDIX H: INMARSAT CAUSE CODESTable H-1 defines the maintenance port menu fault codes of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. Table H-1  Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition1001 Call cleared by MES terminal (normal termination of call)1011 Call failed, MES terminal busy1012 Call cleared, MES terminal busy1021 Call failed, MES time-out (no answer)1081 Call failed, MES terminal not installed1091 Call failed, MES terminal out-of-service1092 Call cleared, MES terminal out-of-service1141 MES preempted clear by higher priority call1142 MES preempted fixed call by higher priority call1143 Offered call cleared, pre-empted at MES1144 Call cleared, MES initiated preemption1145 Attempted call cleared, pre-empted at MES1146 Attempted call abandoned by MES terminal1202 Handover, MES ready1281 Call failed, MES cannot accept1291 Call failed, MES cannot accept at present1351 Call cleared, insufficient free memory1361 Call cleared by MES cable unwrap1362 Call cleared, long interruption in reception at MES1363 MES secondary clear due to re-point OR1391 Call cleared, traveled distance exceeds 700km1392 Call cleared, spot beam transition (call terminated because aircraft left spot beam)1393 Call cleared, cooperative mode1451 Call failed, terrestrial circuits congested1452 Call failed, LES congested (no channel and no circuit)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 H-23 JUN 101502 Handover, LES Ready, normal clear1551 Call failed, LES congested (no channel)1581 Call failed, service not provided at this LES1591 Call failed, service temporarily not available at this LES1592 Call cleared, credit card type not supported1651 Call failed, LES congested (no channel terminal)1661 Call failed, long interruption in reception at LES1662 LES long term blockage of SCPC MES1790 Call cleared, failure credit card validation process1791 Call cleared, failure authentication process1811 NCS MES ID busy1812 NCS MES ID busy IPDS1841 Call cleared, NCS initiated preemption for incoming Pri.1 call1842 Call cleared, NCS initiated preemption for incoming Pri.2 call1843 Call cleared, NCS initiated preemption for incoming Pri.3 call1844 Call cleared, NCS initiated preemption1851 Call failed, satellite congestion NCS reject no SCPC available1852 Call failed, satellite congestion NCS reject SCPC does not match request1853 Call failed, lease channel congestion1854 Call failed, MES outside spot beam coverage area1855 Call rejected, preemption failed, no channel available1856 Call rejected, spot beam selection failed1857 Handover failed, channel not available2000 MES int reject MES RQ invalid CNO2001 MES int reject MES RQ failed qualification2010 MES int reject MES RP invalid CNO2011 MES int reject MES RP failed qualification2012 MES int reject MES RP operation timeout2020 MES int reject NCSA missing Table H-1  Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 H-33 JUN 102021 MES int reject NCSA invalid CNO2022 MES int reject NCSA failed qualification2023 Call failed, Signal lost on NCSA during call setup, check antenna and try again2024 Call failed, Missing channel assignment, try again2025 Call failed, Signal lost on NCSC during call setup, check antenna and try again2030 MES int reject LES ID failed qualification2040 MES int reject SCCS invalid CNO2041 MES int reject SCCS not paired2048 Call failed, invalid number dialed2049 Call failed, terminal not ready for call, try later2050 Call failed, Not allowed to make another mobile call yet, wait 20 seconds and try again2051 Call failed, dialed number is barred2052 Call failed, LES selected is barred2053 Call failed, number dialed must be in a phonebook2053 Call failed, terminal can only be used with a valid SIM2055 Call failed, user not logged in2056 Call failed, user not logged in to SIM2057 Call failed, LES is not in SIM allowed list2058 Call cleared, SIM removed during call2059 Call failed, terminal is locked for outgoing calls2060 MES int reject NCSS failed qualification2061 MES int reject spot beam invalid2062 Call failed, no spot beams in the ocean region, select another OR2063 Terminal ID is not set correctly, check with dealer2070 Lost NCSC signal, seeking2071 Stand-Alone Mode finished, seeking network2080 SIM error, check SIM is inserted correctly Table H-1  Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 H-43 JUN 102090 MES int reject ORR query invalid2091 MES int reject ORR invalid2092 MES int reject MES RR failed qualification2093 MES int reject MES RR invalid CNO2094 MES int reject NCRA missing2095 MES int reject NCRA lost lock2100 MES int reject illegal call type2101 MES Int reject illegal peripheral2102 Call request failed, call already in progress2103 Call failed, star code is badly formatted2104 Call failed, cannot accept two address book star codes2105 Call failed, address book entry not found2106 Call failed, star code does not exist2120 MES int reject no transmit power available2200 Battery flat for terminal operation2201 Call cleared, used all allocated time for call type2300 MES int reject no coop response2301 MES int reject no power2302 MES int reject no location report2400 MES int reject no ORA SU found8000 ACSE Recycling8001 ACSE Top Of Find BB8002 ACSE Top Of Process BB8010 ACSE Finding Primary NCS Long8011 ACSE Finding Secondary NCS Short8012 ACSE Finding Primary Standalone Short8013 ACSE Finding Primary NCS Short8014 ACSE Finding Primary Standalone Long8018 ACSE Finding Secondary Standalone Short Table H-1  Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 H-53 JUN 108019 ACSE Finding Secondary Standalone Long8020 ACSE Found Primary NCS8021 ACSE Found Secondary NCS8022 ACSE Found Primary Standalone8023 ACSE Found Secondary Standalone8024 ACSE found primary NGNCS8025 ACSE found secondary NGNCS8030 ACSE NSR Invalid8040 ACSE Inert8041 ACSE ODU Status8080 ACSE NSR Valid8081 ACSE NSR Valid LES A8100 ACSE Booting8110 ACSE Booted8120 ACSE FIDR ID Invalid8200 ACSE Spot Beam Selection8201 ACSE Next Spot Beam8202 ACSE Successful Spot Beam Selection8203 ACSE Failed To Find Spot Beam8204 ACSE Spot Beam Selective Clear8210 ACSE Spot Beam Reject Mobile Call No ID8211 ACSE Spot Beam Reject Mobile Call No TDM8300 ACSE ORR8301 ACSE Successful ORR8302 ACSE Failed ORR8303 ACSE No ORR8304 ACSE ORR Tune NCRA8305 ACSE ORR MES RR8306 ACSE failed retry ORR Table H-1  Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 H-63 JUN 108310 ACSE ORR Query Begin8311 ACSE ORR Query Burst8312 ACSE ORR Query Successful8313 ACSE ORR Query Failed8400 ACSE Fixed Begin8401 ACSE Fixed MESRP8402 ACSE Fixed Call Type Set8410 ACSE Fixed Tune NCSA8411 ACSE Fixed Channel Assignment8420 ACSE Fixed Clearing Call8421 ACSE Fixed Selective Clear8480 ACSE Fixed SCPC Begin8481 ACSE Fixed SCPC Transmitting8482 ACSE Fixed Authentication Begin8483 ACSE Fixed Authentication End8484 ACSE Fixed Power Control8485 ACSE Fixed MES Connect8486 ACSE Fixed Ringing Begin8500 ACSE Mobile Begin8501 ACSE Mobile MES RQ18502 ACSE Mobile MES RQ28503 ACSE Mobile Call Type Set8510 ACSE Mobile Tune NCSA8511 ACSE Mobile Channel Assignment8520 ACSE Mobile Clearing Call8521 ACSE Mobile Selective Clear8580 ACSE Mobile SCPC Begin8581 ACSE Mobile SCPC Transmitting8582 ACSE Mobile Authentication Begin Table H-1  Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 H-73 JUN 108583 ACSE Mobile Authentication End8584 ACSE Mobile Power Control8585 ACSE Mobile LES Connect8586 ACSE Mobile Ringing Begin8600 MPDS SCPC Mode Selected8800 ACSE cable call begin8801 ACSE cable call successful8900 ACSE Logoff Begin8901 ACSE Successful Logoff8902 ACSE No ORR Logoff9000 ACSE accepts call9003 ACSE accepted9004 ACSE rejected9020 ACSE call waiting9021 ACSE idle selective clear9022 ACSE TDM not found9080 ACSE rejected fixed call due to invalid NSR9081 ACSE In MRSi9082 ACSE sounder turned on9083 ACSE sounder turned off9084 ACSE in lock9085 ACSE out of lock9086 ACSE ext sounder turned on9087 ACSE ext sounder turned off9088 ACSE timer about to expire9090 ACSE Smartcard activated9091 ACSE Smartcard removed9092 ACSE Smartcard error9100 Peripheral on hook Table H-1  Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 H-83 JUN 109101 Peripheral off hook9102 Peripheral connected9103 Peripheral ringing9104 Peripheral ready9105 Peripheral hanging up9106 Peripheral hang up9107 Peripheral not responding9108 Peripheral dialing9109 Peripheral abort dialing9120 Peripheral DTMF accepted9121 Peripheral DTMF rejected9122 Peripheral invalid request9123 Peripheral valid request9124 Peripheral bonding auto9125 Peripheral bonding slave9126 Peripheral bonding none9130 Peripheral STU enabled9131 Peripheral STU disabled9200 MSG T_AM received 9201 MSG A_AM received9202 MSG T_HA received9203 MMI normal9204 MMI inert9205 MMI programming9206 MMI reboot9207 MMI powerdown9208 MMI accepted9209 MMI rejected400000 CT SP bad Table H-1  Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 H-93 JUN 10400000 No call pending400001 CT SP good400002 CT SP full400003 CT SP access denied400080 CT SP find400081 CT SP enumerate400082 CT SP no entries400090 CT SP delete400100 CT SP spot beam selection400105 CT SP MPDS400110 CT SP ocean region registration400111 CT SP ORR query400112 CT SP log off400120 CT SP cable call400200 CT SP go idle400201 CT SP go idle due to configuration400202 CT SP selective clear400208 CT SP go idle clear spot beam400209 CT SP go idle clear NSR400210 CT SP go inert400211 CT SP go inert Smartcard400212 CT SP go inert DDS poll400900 CT SP ODU status400901 CT SP ODU status no alarms400902 CT SP ODU status DDS400910 CT SP prod test400911 CT SP prod test ODU401000 CT SP clear spot beam800124 Mobile Aero 64k speech Table H-1  Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 H-103 JUN 10800404 Mobile data800504 Mobile facsimile800606 Mobile 64k UDI800607 Mobile 56k UDI800610 Mobile 64k audio 3k1800622 Mobile Aero 64k UDI800623 Mobile Aero 56k UDI800625 Mobile Aero 64k audio 3k111A0 Call cleared, credit card not accepted11D1 Call failed, Request data invalid11D2 Call failed, insufficient digits in service address11D3 Call failed, invalid service address11D4 Call cleared, credit card data information invalid11D5 Call cleared, invalid country code11D6 Call cleared, PID information is not consistent11D7 Call rejected, invalid service for Pri.1 or 2 call11D8 Call cleared, dialed number not 2 or 3 digits for Pr.1 or 2 call11E0 Call cleared, invalid credit card PIN at this LES11E1 Call cleared, too many invalid credit card call attempts12B1 Call cleared by MES for unspecified reason, for example: • GPS conflict • Insufficient HPA power available to make call • HPA over current12C2 Call cleared, no credit card valid message received12C3 Call failed, MES time-out (no terrestrial answer)12C4 Call cleared, authentication query not received (usually caused by call setup failure)12C5 Call cleared, MES missing sup service SU12C6 Call cleared, MES missing sup service 2SU12C7 Call cleared, MES missing SCPC channel release SU sup service Table H-1  Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 H-113 JUN 1012C8 Handover failed, LES not detected12D1 Call failed, Spot-beam data invalid12D2 Call failed, invalid scrambling vector15A1 Call failed, MES not authorized at this LES15A2 Call failed, service not authorized at this LES15A3 Call cleared, credit card not authorized15A4 Call cleared, authentication reply invalid15A5 Call failed, PID not authorized for any service15A6 Call failed, PID not authorized for requested service15B1 Call cleared by LES for unspecified reason15C1 Call failed, LES time-out (no assignment)15C2 Call failed, LES time-out (no service address)15C3 Call failed, LES time-out (no scrambling vector)15C4 Call failed, no service address and no scrambling vector15C5 Call cleared, incomplete credit card data information15C7 Call failed, LES time-out (no MES Connect)15C9 Call cleared, no authentication reply15CA Call cleared, notification ack not received15CB Call cleared, invalid sequence number in notification ack15CC Handover failed, no response to request15CD Handover failed, MES not ready15D1 Call failed, LES time-out (invalid assignment)15D2 LES MES already busy15E1 Call cleared but MES still transmitting (FAULT)16C2 LES missing MES SCPC16C3 Handover failed, MES not detected18A1 NCS MES ID not found18A2 Call failed, MES not authorized18A3 Call failed, LES not authorized Table H-1  Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 H-123 JUN 1018B1 Call failed by NCS for unspecified reason18B2 Call rejected, invalid service requested18C1 NCS MES burst missing18C3 NCS MES busy preemption failed18D1 Call failed, invalid call request18E1 NCS MES busy already18E2 NCS MES busy already MPDS1F01 Call cleared by terrestrial circuit (normal call termination from ground source)1F11 Call failed, terrestrial party busy1F21 Call failed, LES time-out (no answer)1F61 Call failed, terrestrial circuit failure (call attempted during ORR)1F62 Call failed, early clear by terrestrial circuit2F00 LES int reject lack of MES RESP response2F01 LES int reject lack of MES ARN response2F02 LES int reject incorrect SVECSCPC4000A0 CT SP any4000F0 CT Terminal ID4000F1 CT Options4000F2 CT config names80010F Mobile 64k speech8D0FFF Mobile Mini-M8E0FFF Mobile HSD8F0FFF Mobile90A0 EXPPORT bonding started90A1 EXPPORT bonding ended90A2 EXPPORT remote panel present90A3 EXPPORT remote panel removed90B0 ACSE MPDS mode selected90B1 ACSE SCPC mode selected Table H-1  Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 H-133 JUN 1090C0 ACSE transmit on90C1 ACSE transmit off90D0 ACSE spot beam handover started90D1 ACSE spot beam termination timer started90F0 Event log wipedB000 Mod error, generalB001 Mod error, tune failedB002 Mod error, mode failedB003 Mod error, mmr failedB004 Mod error, not respondingB010 MOD Invalid ModeB011 MOD Command InvalidB020 Mod error, su underflowB021 MOD Su overflowB022 MOD Su not transmittedB024 MOD invalid frame noB025 MOD invalid slot noB028 MOD cannot Tx Su while tuningB030 MOD channel out of rangeB032 MOD cannot tune while TxB033 MOD tuning in progressB040 MOD error watchdogB100 DEMOD error, generalB101 DEMOD error, tune failedB102 DEMOD error, mode failedB110 DEMOD invalid modeB130 DEMOD channel out of rangeB133 DEMOD tuning in progressB200 Generic modem error Table H-1  Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 H-143 JUN 10B201 RF error RX VHFB202 RF error RX LbandB204 RF error RX VHFB208 RF error TX LbandB210 RF error RF errorB220 RF error Ref errorB27F Mod watchdog trippedB280 Generic voice codec errorsB281 TMS spurious interruptB300 Outdoor terminal failure, check connections to ODUB301 ODU error cannot set cable attenuatorB310 ODU error power response missingB311 ODU error tune response missingB312 ODU error HPA control response missingB313 ODU error HPA status response missingB314 ODU error alarm response missingB315 ODU error burst timer response missingB316 ODU error HPA backoff response missingB320 ODU error alarm heatB321 ODU error alarm burstB322 ODU error alarm powerB323 ODU error alarm over voltageB324 ODU error alarm reverse powerB328 ODU failed due to tx power checkB329 ODU error alarm timeoutB330 ODU error alarm timeout no tripB400 Internal temperature of terminal too high, turn off for 10 minutesB401 Internal temperature sensor failedB410 Mod error, handshake failure, power down/up and try again Table H-1  Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 H-153 JUN 10B500 Battery charging communication failureB501 Power supply errorB580 Battery is over temperature, charging disabledB581 Battery temperature is now ok, charging enabledC0010F Fixed 64k speechC00124 Fixed Aero 64k speechC00404 Fixed dataC00504 Fixed facsimileC00606 Fixed 64k UDIC00607 Fixed 56k UDIC00610 Fixed 64k audio 3k1C00622 Fixed Aero 64k UDIC00623 Fixed Aero 56k UDIC00625 Fixed Aero 64k audio 3k1CD0FFF Fixed Mini-MCE0FFF Fixed HSDCF0FFF Fixed FFFD ACSE end marker (MPDS)FFFE Status undefined (MPDS)FFFF Status OK (MPDS) Table H-1  Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal23-15-30 H-163 JUN 10Blank Page

Navigation menu